VOLUME-5 SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS
PROPOSED AL TADAWI HOSPITAL, AT PLOT NO 2140857, AL GARHOUD COMMUNITY/BLOCK, DUBAI
INDEX SPECIFICATIONS
PART B – ELECTRICAL WORKS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION: SECTION 1
:
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 2
:
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
SECTION 3
:
STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR
SECTION 4
:
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 5
:
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
SECTION 6
:
MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
SECTION 7
:
SECTION 8
:
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS, REGULATORS AND HARMONIC FILTERS CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDERS AND FITTINGS
SECTION 9
:
SYSTEM OF WIRING
SECTION 10
:
LIGHTING
SECTION 11
:
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 12
:
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
SECTION 13
:
EARTHING
SECTION 14
:
UPS SYSTEM
SECTION 15
:
ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
SECTION 16
:
CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
SECTION 17
:
VOICE / DATA SYSTEM
SECTION 18
:
CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
SECTION 19
:
NURSE CALL SYSTEM
SECTION 20
:
CENTRAL CLOCK SYSTEM
SECTION 21
:
PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
SECTION 22
:
ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
SECTION 23
:
MATV System
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
JULY 2014
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS-INDEX 1.0
SCOPE OF WORKS
2.0
GENERAL
3.0
EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS
4.0
PERMITS FEES AND INSPECTIONS.
5.0
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
6.0
SHOP DRAWINGS, BUILDERS WORK DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
7.0
RECORD (AS BUILT) DRAWINGS
8.0
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANAULS
9.0
TEMPORARY SERVICE.
10.0
COOPERATION
11.0
EXISTING WORK AND EQUIPMENT
12.0
SUPERVISION.
13.0
CLEANING.
14.0
ACCESSIBILITY, ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS.
15.0
CONTRACTORS DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
16.0
HIGH VOLTAGE NETWORK
17.0
AUTHORITIES APPROVAL.
18.0
REGULATIONS Page 2 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
19.0
DEFINITIONS
20.0
PHASE IDENTIFICATION
21.0
VOLTAGE DROP
22.0
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INTERFERENCE
23.0
SEGREGATION OF SERVICES
24.0
BUILDER'S WORK
25.0
FOUNDATION BOLTS AND SUPPORTS
26.0
DESIGN AND STANDARDISATION
27.0
MATERIALS, SHOP DRAWINGS AND WORKMANSHIP
28.0
SAMPLES
29.0
STORAGE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
30.0
PAINTING (ELECTRICAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT)
31.0
LABELS
32.0
INSPECTION AND TESTS AT MANUFACTURER'S WORKS - LOCAL
33.0
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING AT SITE
34.0
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE.
35.0
CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION.
36.0
GUARANTEES.
37.0
MAINTENANCE
38.0
SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS Page 3 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SCOPE OF WORKS The Scope of works includes the supply, delivery to site, installation, commissioning and testing of the various complete systems outlined briefly below, and as described elsewhere in the specification documents. The contractor shall be responsible to visit the site to familiarize himself with the scope of work and preparation of shop drawings and obtaining approval from the various authorities prior to execution of work. The contractor shall also be responsible for obtaining all materials and workmanship approval during execution and on completion of works including the connection of permanent power supply and KWH meter. All costs and charges required by the various authorities shall be included in the scope of work except the power connection charges which shall be paid by the client. LV switchboards and all necessary interconnecting cabling and associated earthing systems. Soft starters, variable frequency drives. Motor control centre. Submain distribution switch gear. Sub-main distribution cabling including all cable trays, brackets and cleats. Final sub-circuit wiring including all necessary conduit and trunking. All general and special purpose power accessories and switchgear. Standby Generator. UPS System Light fittings, switches and all connections for lighting installations. Lightning protection system, earthing system and harmonic protection. Central Battery Back up Emergency lighting system Analogue addressable Fire Alarm system. CCTV System. SMATV System. Voice / Data System. Lighting Control system. Access Control system.
Page 4 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Central Clock system. Public Address / Background Music system. Nurse Call System All necessary power supplies terminating in an isolating switch located within 2 meters of the mechanical equipment/panels. All coordination with other subtrades to supply and install power supply to the various equipment including all conduiting and ducts for the installation of the control wires by the equipment supplier. Any cost associated with removing existing services of electrical, control system and telephone system. 1.1
The work shall comprise the whole of the labour and, unless otherwise indicated, all the materials necessary to form a complete installation and such tests, adjustments and commissioning as are prescribed in subsequent clauses and as may otherwise be required to give an effective working installation to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.0
GENERAL
2.1
This specification is for the Mechanical and Electrical (MEP) works. However, the Instructions to Tenderers, Form of Tender, Conditions of contract, Note on Pricing, Preliminaries Section and any Supplementary Conditions of Contract applicable to Main Contract shall be applicable to this contract also.
2.2
The term Contractor used in the MEP documents and drawings is to be considered to mean the Contractor for MEP works.
2.3
Contractor shall be responsible for proper performance of all MEP systems in accordance with relevant standards and codes and design parameters listed hereinafter.
2.4
Provide all items, articles, materials, operations, sundries, labour, supervision, guarantees, allowances for overhead and profit, etc., to achieve a fully functionable and acceptable system.
2.5
The precedence of documents and drawings shall be as determined in the Main Contract. However, consider the specifications as an integral part of the work together with the drawings. Consider any item or subject omitted from one, but mentioned or reasonably implied on the other as properly and sufficiently indicated and provide the same under the work of this division.
2.6
The Contractor is responsible for developing his own take off of materials and is to make this available as requested to the Consultant.
3.0
EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS. Page 5 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1
Visit the site of the proposed works and obtain all information as to existing conditions and limitations and all proposed works on adjacent sites and in adjacent areas which might affect the works on this site, whether by Private Individuals or by Government Authorities or others.
3.2
Examine the documents including the Specifications and Drawings of all other Divisions before bidding and again before commencing any portion of the works.
3.3
Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for any claim for extra work or expense resulting from the failure of the Contractor to be fully aware of Site Conditions.
4.0
PERMITS FEES AND INSPECTIONS.
4.1
Arrange for inspection of all work by the Local Authorities as and where applicable. This is to occur on an on-going basis throughout construction to avoid delays to the project. On completion of the work, present to the Consultant, for the Owner, final unconditional approval certificates of the Inspecting Authorities.
4.2
Pay fees/charges as levied by the Local Authorities for inspections, approvals, temporary services, connections, etc. at no additional cost to contract.
4.3
Before commencing any work on site, submit the shop drawings (approved by the Consultant) to the Authorities, as and where applicable, for checking and approval. Follow the progress of such drawings to permit the timely approval of them by the Authorities. Comply with any changes requested by the Authorities, but notify the Consultant immediately of any such change and obtain his approval.
5.0
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
5.1
The drawings for services works are design drawings, diagrammatic, and intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate locations of apparatus, fixtures, pipe and duct runs, etc. The drawings do not intend to indicate architectural or structural details. These cannot be used as shop drawings. Contractor must develop own detailed shop drawings for work at site.
5.2
Do not scale drawings. Obtain accurate dimensions to structure and architectural items from drawings of those trades. Confirm by site measurement. Verify location and elevation of all services (Water, Electrical, Telephone, Sanitary, Storm Drainage, Gas, etc.,) before proceeding with the work.
5.3
Make at no extra cost, any changes or additions to materials, and/ or equipment necessary to accommodate structural conditions (pipes or ducts around beams, columns, etc.)
5.4
Alter, at no additional cost, the location of materials and/ or equipment as directed, provided that the changes are made before installation and do not necessitate additional material.
5.5
Install all ceiling mounted components (Diffusers, grilles, detectors, light fixtures, emergency lights, fire detectors, loudspeakers, camera points, etc.) in accordance with the reflected ceiling drawings which are to be prepared by the Contractor and coordinated with all Page 6 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
trades. These must be submitted for approval and be approved before any work commences on site. 5.6
Leave space clear and install all work to accommodate future materials and/or equipment as indicated and/or supplied by other divisions of work of the contract. Install all pipe runs, conduit runs, cable trays, etc., to maintain maximum headroom and clearances, and to conserve space in shafts and ceiling spaces and under floors, and to provide adequate space for service and maintenance.
5.7
Confirm on the site the exact location of outlets and fixtures.
6.0
SHOP DRAWINGS, BUILDER’S WORK DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
6.1
Within 15 days of award of Contract, submit programme of works. Alongwith the programme, submit a schedule detailing proposed submission dates for all Material Submittals, Shop drawings and Builder’s work drawings. Allow 15 days review period by the Consultant for each submission.
6.2
Contractor must obtain, from the Consultant, approvals of all materials, equipment and drawings within appropriate time to facilitate work at site, but, within 75 days latest, from the Contract award date. This period includes any required resubmissions till final approval is obtained.
6.3
Prepare drawings in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing sleeves and openings for all passages through structure and all insert sizes and locations.
6.4
Prepare composite construction drawings, fully dimensioned, of piping and equipment in tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms and areas, and all other critical locations to avoid a conflict of trades. Base equipment drawings upon shop drawings and include but do not necessarily limit to, all details pertaining to access, cleanouts, tappings, sleeves, electrical connections, drains, location and elevation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from consultation with, and agreement of, all trades involved.
6.5
Prepare drawings of equipment bases, pump pits, anchors, inertia slabs, floor and roof curbs, wall openings, trenches.
6.6
Prepare all drawings to scale as agreed with the Consultant. Generally, the scale shall be 1:50 for layouts and 1:20 for Details and Sections, etc. Forward these drawings, approved by all trades concerned to the Consultant for his records. Provide copies in a number as specified elsewhere in the Contract but not less than four sets.
6.7
Drawings production and presentation is a Contractual matter and any delay in making these submissions will be considered a Contractual delay and may be subject to Contractual penalties in accordance with Contract documents.
6.8
The Consultant will only consider shop drawings bearing the stamp of the Contractor and all Subcontractors involved. Check for all pertinent information such as physical dimensions, make, performance, electrical characteristics and indicate the intended use and location before submitting these drawings. Use reference symbols or enumeration to correspond to the design drawings. Page 7 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6.9
Assume responsibility for accuracy of equipment dimensions related to space available, accessibility for maintenance and service, compliance with inspection authorities codes. Ensure that shop drawings indicate working weights of all equipment.
6.10
The submission of samples, wherever required by Consultant, will be subject to the same procedure as that of shop drawings. One set of such samples shall be required to be brought to site and kept there after approval till substantial completion.
6.11
The Consultant will mark the drawings "Approved / Approved with comments / Revise and Resubmit / Not Approved. Contractor shall resubmit accordingly.
6.12
The Consultant is not responsible for any delays caused by the inadequacy of the Contractor's drawings or his failure to obtain initial or subsequent approval. Any time taken by the Contractor to obtain approval after the originally scheduled date will be considered as a delay to the contract caused by the Contractor.
6.13
The Consultant's review shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Contract documents, unless he has, in writing, called the Consultant's attention to such deviations at the time of submission of drawings. The Consultant's approval shall not relieve the Contractor from the entire responsibility. Any approval by the Consultant shall be on the understanding that any item submitted shall be ordered with options and modifications to fully meet the specification. Any fabrication, erection, setting out or other work done in advance of receipt of stamped drawings shall be done entirely at the Contractor's risk and cost.
6.14
Furnish prints of the reviewed details to all other parties who may require them for proper coordination of their work, and furnish all information necessary for the work as a whole.
6.15
Obtain Manufacturers' installation directions to aid in the proper execution of the work. Submit two copies of such directions to the Consultant prior to installation, for use in inspecting the work.
7.0
RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWINGS
7.1
As the job progresses mark on one set of prints to accurately indicate the status of installed work. Have the prints available for inspection at the site at all times. 30 days before commissioning, finalise the As Built drawings and submit 2 sets as draft to the consultant for checking and approval. Upon approval, submit one set of transparencies and three sets of prints to the consultant for onward transmission to the client. Also submit a CD containing soft copies of all As Built drawings and technical details of all systems and equipments.
7.2
Show on the record drawings the installed inverts of all services entering and leaving the building and the property. Dimension underground services at key points of every run in relation to structure and building. Record all elevations for underground services in relation to floor level of the building and give reference datums to Municipal benchmarks.
8.0
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
8.1
Upon successful commissioning, submit one draft of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for review and approval of Consultant. Separate binders shall be used as follows : Page 8 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 8.2
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
HVAC. Electrical Low Current Systems. Fire alarm system. Central battery system. Plumbing and Drainage. Fire and Safety. Any Services other than above.
The minimum information required is as follows : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Catalogs highlighting the Make, Model and other necessary details for all Material and Equipment installed. List of Local Agents / Suppliers for all Materials and Equipment with Telephone, Fax and Email address. Detailed description of systems operation. Procedures for Preventive, regular and the breakdown maintenance, with Manufacturer’s Operation and Maintenance Catalog for all Systems / Equipments. Commissioning data for all Systems / Equipment. List of recommended spares. (Ensure availability of the spares for at least 7 years). Diagnosis of faults / remedy action guidelines.
8.3
Upon approval of the draft by the Consultant, submit 4 set of manuals to Consultants for onward submission to the Owner. Atleast one set of the manuals shall contain originals of catalogues and brochures.
9.0
TEMPORARY SERVICE.
9.1
Do not use any of the permanent service facilities during construction, unless specific written approval is obtained from the Consultant and the Owner or where specifically allowed elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
9.2
In the event that mains power is not available or is not of sufficient capacity for commissioning and testing, supply, install and operate diesel generator(s) of the correct capacity. Any generator must have full safety features and must be maintained regularly to ensure site power at all times.
10.0
COOPERATION
10.1
Confer with all trades installing equipment which may affect the work of this division, and arrange equipment in proper relation with that equipment installed under all Divisions of the Contract.
10.2
Furnish all items to be built in by others, in time, complete with all pertinent information, commensurate with the progress of the work.
10.3
Store materials neatly and out of the way and clean up all refuse caused by the work daily.
11.0
EXISTING WORK AND EQUIPMENT Page 9 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Before this Contractor undertakes work in any area he must prepare a list of deficiencies in that area which affect his works, or which could possibly be construed as being caused by himself if not noted. In the event that such deficiency list is not prepared, then he shall be deemed responsible for such deficiencies. Any list shall be brought to the attention of the Consultant forthwith. 12.0
SUPERVISION.
12.1
The Subcontractor will maintain at site, as necessary for the performance of the Contract, qualified personnel and supporting staff, with proven experience in erecting, testing, and adjusting projects of comparable nature and complexity.
12.2
Before commencing work the Contractor will submit details of the proposed Engineers and Supervisors, including copies of their Certificates. If in the Consultant's opinion the proposed Engineers or Supervisors are not adequately qualified or are otherwise unacceptable, the onus is on the Contractor to submit alternates until such approval is given.
12.3
Where the Contractor's staff becomes during the Contract deficient in performance, the Contractor is to remedy the situation by immediate and appropriate replacement, to Consultant’s approval.
12.4
Approval of the Contractor's Engineers or Staff shall in no way prevent the withdrawal of that approval at any time during the Contract should the Consultant so desire. In the event of such disapproval, Contractor will be required to rectify the position as stated above within 14 days.
12.5
In the event of any negligent or severely detrimental behavior the Consultant has the right to order the removal from site of any Engineer, Supervisor, or worker on a “forthwith" basis.
13.0
CLEANING.
13.1
Each day as the work proceeds and on completion, clean up and remove from the premises all rubbish, surplus material, equipment, machinery, tools, scaffolds, and other items used in the performance of the work. Clean out dirt and debris and leave the buildings broom clean with no stains and in a condition acceptable to the Consultant.
13.2
Where electrical items form part of the visible finish in the rooms, protect from over-painting, etc. and give all items a final cleaning before handing over of the project.
14.0
ACCESSIBILITY, ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS.
14.1
Any item of equipment requiring maintenance shall be located so as to be accessible for maintenance or repair without removing adjacent structures, equipment, pipings, ducts or other materials.
14.2
Install all concealed equipment requiring adjustment or maintenance in locations easily accessible through access panels or doors. Install systems and components to result in a minimum number of access panels. Indicate access panels on as-built drawings.
14.3
Provide the respective Division of work with panels, doors or frames, complete with all pertinent information for installation. Page 10 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Ensure that access doors are installed in a manner to match the building grids where applicable. 14.4
Prepare detail drawings showing location and type of all access doors in coordination with other trades before proceeding with installation and hand these to the Contractor to obtain approval.
14.5
Size all access doors to provide adequate access and commensurate with the type of structure and Architectural finish. Should it be necessary for persons to enter, provide a minimum opening of 600 x 450mm.
14.6
Ensure proper fire rating of access doors in fire separations
14.7
Lay-in type ceiling tiles, if properly marked may serve as access panels.
14.8
The access panels shall be constructed and shall have finishing to match surrounding architectural construction and finishes and shall be to engineer’s approval or as specified elsewhere in the contract documents.
15.0
CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY
15.1
The appointed Contractor shall accept full functional responsibility for all electrical services to meet the requirements of the Client/Engineer and generally in accordance with this specification.
15.2
The Contractors tender submission shall include for all the necessary material, plant, equipment and systems to meet the Engineer's approval whether specifically mentioned herein or not. The scope of work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:-
15.3
(a)
LV site cabling.
(b)
All main and sub-main switchgear with allowance for future extension.
(c)
All internal LV and control cabling.
(d)
All emergency and escape lighting.
(e)
All lighting and lighting control system
(f)
All Fire alarm and life safety installations.
(g)
All low current system installations.
(h)
All telecommunication / data system installations.
(i)
All Security & Access control system installations.
(j)
Electrical services for mechanical services plant.
Design Parameters The electrical system equipment selection and installation shall comply with the particular requirements listed hereunder: Page 11 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
15.4
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Site Conditions All electrical equipment and components shall be selected and installed such as to operate satisfactorily and safely under the following climatic conditions. Maximum shade temperature in summer Direct sun temperature in summer Minimum ambient temperature in winter Relative humidity max Rusty atmosphere
15.5
50 deg. C 84 deg. C 2.8 deg. C 100
System of Supply Three phase, neutral and separate protective conductor (TT). The system of supply shall be at 380V / 400V 3Ph, 50HZ with a maximum short circuit capacity of 50 KA for 1 second at the main bus bar of the LV Switch Board. The electrical system shall have following system variations at the sub-station: Voltage +/- 6% Frequency +/- 4%
16.0
HIGH VOLTAGE NETWORK
16.1
The contractor shall be responsible for all negotiations with the DEWA to ensure that supplies are available to meet the construction programme. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to execute all civil construction work connected with the HV Distribution Network as required by DEWA. All costs associated with acquiring permanent incoming mains supply including all civil works shall be included in the contract except for the power connection charges which shall be paid by the client.
17.0
AUTHORITIES APPROVAL.
17.1
The contractor shall be responsible for liaising with DEWA, ETISALAT/DU and the Civil Defence Authority and any other authorities after obtaining the Consultant's approval, in order to :-
18.0
(a)
Approve the shop Drawings, before ordering any equipment, and commencing with the installation.
(b)
Approve any excavation prior to installation;
(c)
Acquire main supply connection;
(d)
Approve the Fire Alarm, Telephone systems etc.
REGULATIONS The installation shall be carried out in accordance with the current edition and supplements of the following Regulations and Standards: (a)
Statutory Regulations of DEWA. Page 12 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
19.0
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(b)
It is the contractor's responsibility to ensure that the electrical work and installation meets with the requirements of the relevant authorities and there shall be no extra cost whatsoever paid by the client due to the requirement of the authorities.
(c)
IEE regulations with latest amendments.
(d)
All relevant BS, IEC Standards.
(f)
Other appropriate regulations under statute.
(g)
Requirements of BS 7671, 1992
DEFINITIONS For the purpose of this Specification:
20.0
(1)
The definitions given in the IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations apply.
(2)
The words "weatherproof" and "dust protecting" shall have the meanings ascribed to them in the relevant regulations.
(3)
The words "complete installation" in clause 1.1 shall mean not only the major items of plant and apparatus conveyed by the Specification, but all the incidental sundry components necessary for the complete execution of the works and for the proper operation of the installation, with their labour charges, whether or not these sundry components are mentioned in detail in the tender documents issued in connection with the contract.
PHASE IDENTIFICATION The cable connected to phase "R" shall be in all cases coloured Red, the cables connected to phase 'Y' shall be coloured Yellow, and the cables connected to phase ‘B’ shall be coloured Blue. The neutral conductor shall in all cases be Black. Any insulated earth wires shall be coloured Green or Green/Yellow. These colours shall be continued up to the actual terminals or cable lugs.
21.0
VOLTAGE DROP The voltage drop between the incoming LV switchboard and the extremity of any circuit shall not exceed 4% of the nominal supply voltage.
22.0
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INTERFERENCE The whole of the electrical installation work shall be so designed that there is an absolute minimum of interference with telecommunications, and the reception of broadcasting to BS 800 or any other relevant BS.
23.0
SEGREGATION OF SERVICES
Page 13 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The armour of all cables, cable trays, trunking, ducts etc., shall be prevented from coming into contact with non-electrical services by minimum spacing of 150mm. Where this is impracticable they shall be bonded to the exposed metal of the other service through a protective conductor. 24.0
BUILDER'S WORK To reduce the necessity for cutting away and the like, certain holes and chases will be provided in the structure by the Contractor to the Engineer's instructions. The Contractor shall plan his work so that full advantage is taken of these provision's but it is the Contractor's sole responsibility to ensure that all holes and chases are in the required position and that any additional ducts, holes and chases necessary for the execution of his work in the in-situ concrete walls, floor slabs, columns and beams are executed in the early stage of construction of the building.
25.0
FOUNDATION BOLTS AND SUPPORTS
25.1
The Contractor shall arrange for the supply of, in advance of the delivery of the equipment, all necessary foundation bolts, nuts, plates, sleeves and anchorage’s as and when directed.
25.2
All cable trays, cable trunkings, light fittings and any other electrical components shall be installed and supported using a standard product recommended by the manufacturer, where such support is not a standard product range. The contractor shall only use galvanized material to engineer's approval as a support.
26.0
DESIGN AND STANDARDISATION
26.1
The Works shall be executed to facilitate inspection, cleaning and repairs for use where continuity of operation is the first consideration. All equipment supplied shall ensure satisfactory operation under working conditions. All plant containing rotating parts shall be capable of operating at speeds up to the maximum duty specified without vibration or excessive noise.
26.2
Corresponding parts throughout the Contract Works shall be made to gauge and shall be interchangeable wherever possible. The Contractor may be required by the Engineer to prove interchangeability by actual interchanging of the various parts.
26.3
Suitable provision by means of eyebolts or other means are to be provided to facilitate handling of all items that are too heavy or bulky for lifting and carrying by two men (70 kg).
27.0
MATERIALS, SHOP DRAWINGS AND WORKMANSHIP
27.1
The contractor shall be responsible to obtain the Consultant's approval on the detailed working drawings prior to ordering any equipment and commencing the installation.
27.2
Separate drawings shall be provided for each electrical system.
Page 14 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
27.3
The contractor shall be responsible for preparing a dimensional shop drawing showing the exact location and mounting height of the different components.
27.4
The contractor shall also be responsible for preparing enlarged scale details, sections and elevations wherever requested by the Engineer.
27.5
If requested by the Engineer, the contractor shall forward coordinated shop drawings showing the exact locations of all services.
27.6
In addition to the above, the Contractor shall forward schematic diagrams for all system. The schematic diagram shall include all details requested by the Engineer.
27.7
It is a requirement of the specification that the finished appearance of the plant in public areas is of a high architectural standard and all panels, covers, trim panels, finishes and the like shall be included to provide this required appearance to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
27.8
The whole of the equipment supplied shall be of durable finish and suitable for installation in a modern building.
27.9
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the components of each system are mutually compatible and integrated to form fully efficient systems complying with the Drawings and specifications.
27.10
All materials shall be, where applicable, in accordance with the IEE, BS Regulations, UL Specifications, Factories Act and Insurance Company requirements, where such exists, unless otherwise specified or agreed by the Engineer in writing.
27.11
All articles and materials specified to conform to the Standards shall be clearly and indelibly marked and stamped with the Standard number specified and other details required by the regulations, except where marking is impracticable when the relevant advice/delivery notes shall include the Standard number with which they are to comply.
27.12
All materials and workmanship shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer, particular attention shall be paid to a neat orderly well arranged installation, carried out in a methodical competent manner. The contractor shall be responsible to replace all the unsatisfactory work to the engineer without any extra cost and to the standard required by the consultant. This also applies to any item which is found to be defective in service during the maintenance period or extended maintenance as appropriate.
27.13
No person shall be allowed to execute any type of work which is normally carried out by a skilled tradesman unless he is thoroughly experienced and proficient in the trade concerned. The Engineer shall have the option to require a tradesman to demonstrate his proficiency to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
28.0
SAMPLES Whenever requested, the Contractor shall provide a sample properly labelled of all lighting fittings, switches, fittings and other like accessories described in this specification or as specified by the Engineer. Page 15 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Such samples shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval at his offices or elsewhere as directed, with all parts left loose, so that they may be taken apart for internal inspection by hand without the necessity of using spanners, screw drivers or wrenches. 29.0
STORAGE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
29.1
All plant and equipment shall be stored off the ground under weather-proof cover until ready for incorporation in the works. All electrical apparatus shall be examined and cleaned before installation. All open conduit ends shall be fitted with plastic caps or suitable protective covering to prevent the ingress of foreign matter. All drums with cables shall be protected from direct sunlight.
29.2
Protect the building and structures from damage due to carrying out the work.
29.3
Protect all electrical works from damage. Keep all equipment dry and clean at all times.
29.4
The contractor shall be responsible for and make good any damages caused directly or indirectly to any walls, floors, wood work, brickwork, finishes, services etc.
30.0
PAINTING (ELECTRICAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT)
30.1
Where it is the usual practice of the manufacturer of items such as electric motors, switchgear, control panels, and similar equipment, to apply a high standard of protective paint work in the shop before dispatch, this will be acceptable provided any damage to paint work on the plant and equipment which occurs is made good by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The interiors of control panels, switchboards and switchgear, finish paint (two coats work) shall comply with the appropriate standard for enamel finish and the exteriors of such panels shall be of an British Standard colour to give a minimum reflection value of 42%.
30.2
Instruments shall be finished dull black and control handles, push buttons and similar fittings shall be chromium plated or otherwise specially finished to the approval of the Engineer.
30.3
All items of equipment installed above the intalite suspended ceiling shall be painted with a matt black finish.
31.0
LABELS
31.1
Identification labels of 'traffolite' or other approved material engraved black on white both in Arabic and English language unless otherwise agreed, with not less than 5mm 'lino' style letters shall be fixed on or adjacent to all controls, switches and distribution gear by means of at least two brass screws. Socket outlets of voltage other than 220 volt AC shall be similarly identified or engraved.
31.2
The labels shall bear the identifications shown on the drawings, such as identification, designation, function and where necessary, phase and voltage.
31.3
Each distribution board shall be complete with a chart protected by transparent plastic and fixed securely to the inside of the lid indicating details of each circuit controlled by the board. These details shall contain points of utilization served, number and size of conductors and type of wiring.
Page 16 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
31.4
A permanent warning labels durably marked “Earth Connection Do not Disconnect” shall be permanently fixed in a visible position near each earthing and bonding connection.
31.5
A mimic diagram shall be provided on each main, submain panel board and on each motor control centre. INSPECTION AND TESTS AT MANUFACTURER'S WORKS
32.0 32.1
The Engineer shall have at all reasonable times access to the Contractor's premises to inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the plant and equipment during its manufacture there, and if part of the plant and equipment is being manufactured on other premises, the Contractor shall obtain for the engineer permission to inspect as if the plant and equipment was manufactured on the Contractor's own premises. Such inspection, examination or testing, if made, shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation under the Contract.
32.2
All work, materials and the like rejected shall be corrected or replaced as necessary at the Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
32.3
Where the plant and equipment is a composite unit of several individual places manufactured in different places, it shall be assembled and tested as one complete working unit. All equipment will be tested at the maker's works to the relevant standards where applicable.
32.4
The aforementioned works tests carried out before delivery to the Site shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of completing satisfactory site tests after erection as specified.
32.5
The contractor shall give the Engineer reasonable notice, at least seven clear days in writing of the date on and the place at which any plant or equipment will be ready for testing as provided in the contract and the Engineer shall thereupon at his discretion notify the contractor of his intention either to release such part of the plant and equipment upon receipt of the works tests certificates or of his intention to inspect such part of the plant and equipment and shall then, on giving twenty-four hours notice in writing to the Contractor, attend at the place so named within seven days of the date by which the contractor has stated in his notice the said plant and equipment will be ready for testing. The Contractor shall forward to the Engineer six duly certified copies of the test readings.
32.6
Whether at the premises of the Contractor or of any of his sub-contractors, the Contractor except where otherwise specified shall provide, free of charge, such labour, materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be reasonably demanded, to carry out efficiently such tests of the plant and equipment, in accordance with the contract and shall give facilities to the Engineer to accomplish such testing.
32.7
Works tests shall also be carried out such that due consideration is given to the Site conditions under which the equipment is required to function. The test certifications shall give all details of such tests.
32.8
As and when any plant and equipment shall have passed the tests referred to in this clause the Engineer shall issue to the Contractor a notification to that effect.
32.9
The Contractor shall not pack for delivery or transport to Site any part of the plant or equipment until he has obtained from the Engineer his written approval to the release of such part for delivery after any tests required by the Engineer in terms of this clause have been completed to his satisfaction. Page 17 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
32.10
In particular, inspection and test at the maker’s works will be required for standby Generator, UPS and Electrical Switchboard.
33.0
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING AT SITE
33.1
Upon completion of the installation or part of the installation, the Contractor shall carry out and be responsible for the testing and commissioning all plant, equipment and integral systems, in stages if required, to ensure that it is in proper working order and capable of performing all of its functions in accordance with the specification and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all equipment until each item of plant, equipment or system or part thereof has been tested, commissioned and accepted by the Engineer.
33.2
Any equipment damaged in commissioning shall be replaced by new plant by the Contractor at his own expense and the plant, equipment or system concerned shall be re-tested and commissioned. No instruction or action of the Engineer shall relieve the Contractor of this responsibility.
33.3
All testing and commissioning shall be carried out according to the requirements of the relevant Standards and regulations as may be stated or implied in this specification. Contractor shall prepare proper standard inspections, tests and commissioning forms and submit for approval by Engineers and Clients.
33.4
The Contractor shall give to the Engineer in writing at least ten days notice of the date after which he will be ready to make the specified tests on completion of installation. Unless otherwise agreed the tests shall take place within seven days after the said date on such day or days as the Engineer shall in writing notify the Contractor. The tests shall as far as possible be carried out under normal working conditions to the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall extend over such periods as he may direct.
33.5
If in the opinion of the Engineer the tests are being unduly delayed, he may by notice in writing call upon the Contractor to make such tests within ten days from the receipt of the said notice and the Contractor shall make the said tests within the said ten days and notify the Engineer of the days on which the said tests are to be made. If the Contractor fails to make such tests within the time aforesaid the Engineer may himself proceed to make the tests. All tests so made by the Engineer shall be at the risk and expense of the Contractor.
33.6
The Contractor shall provide all skilled labour, supervision, apparatus and instruments required for commissioning and testing and within a reasonable time thereafter furnish to the Engineer six certificates of all tests performed and accepted, signed by the Engineer, the Contractor and an authorized person acting on behalf of DEWA as prescribed in the appropriate Regulations and Specifications.
33.7
If any part of the plant or equipment fails to pass the specified tests, further tests shall, if required by the Engineer, be repeated. The Contractor shall, without delay, put in hand such modifications as are necessary to meet the requirements as described in the Contract and any expense which the Employer may have incurred by reason of such further tests may be deducted from the Contract Price.
33.8
The Contractor shall include for submission of working drawings for the electrical installation to the DEWA for approval and shall allow for the procurement of the DEWA test certificate upon completion of the building following inspection of the electrical installation by DEWA. Page 18 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Acceptance shall not in any way absolve the Contractor of his responsibility for the performance of the plant or equipment after erection as a complete working system in all respects. 34.0
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE.
34.1
The ultimate condition for system acceptance is that the Owner and Consultant have inspected the system and found it to be acceptable, and indicated this in writing. Issuance of the final payment certificate does not necessarily indicate system acceptance, neither does release of final payment holdback in whole or in part. The Consultant's acceptance may be contingent on any or all of the following if applicable:
34.1.1 Submit original copies of letters from manufacturers of all systems indicating that their technical representatives have inspected and tested the respective systems and are satisfied with the methods of installation, connections and operation. 34.1.2 Submit "as built" drawings and operation and maintenance manuals. 34.1.3 Train owner's maintenance staff. 35.0
CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION.
35.1
Remedy all work in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract during the Maintenance period.
35.2
Attend immediately to any and all the defects occurring during the period defined above and repair in a manner to prevent recurrence. This contractor is responsible for all work required by other trades necessary to repair the works of this section, or necessary to repair damage caused by the failure of any part of this section.
35.3
Instruct all Suppliers and Manufacturers that guarantees on equipment will commence when the completed work is accepted and not from the date the equipment is put into operation. In the event that this condition is omitted by the supplier, or if subsequent cost to the Owner is involved. Contractor shall be liable for such costs.
36.0
GUARANTEES
36.1
The Contractor will guarantee all material and workmanship for at least 12 months after preliminary take over by the Owner.
36.2
All guarantees from equipment suppliers will be vested in the Owner, regardless of whether the Contractor who supplied the equipment is still associated with the project or not.
36.3
Guarantees will be full guarantees and will include all overhead, profit, incidental charges and sundries.
36.4
Where damage is caused to any other item by any failure of the item guaranteed, then the guarantee shall also include the costs incurred in rectifying that damage.
37.0
MAINTENANCE. Page 19 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
37.1.
Maintenance is defined as the Contractual Liability to maintain the equipment in working condition, PLUS the regular checks and servicing of equipment during the maintenance period, including all the consumables and spare parts to keep the equipment in best working order.
37.2.
Regular maintenance shall be as necessary, but in any event not less frequently than monthly. Breakdown calls shall be attended immediately.
37.3.
Maintenance period shall be 1 year from the date of handing over for all Electrical works.
37.4
Proper / satisfactory forms of procedure and schedules of maintenance shall be preared complying with manufacturer’s recommendations. These forms shall be submitted for approval by Engineer / Client prior to starting of the maintenance period. Also, a list of contact persons / parties for attending complaints / emergency around the clock shall be submitted.
Page 20 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS
Page 21 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
38.0
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS All the materials supplied under this contract shall be from one of the manufacturers listed below. No alternate Makes shall be accepted unless all the listed Makes are unavailable. Materials proposed from listed Makes also must fully comply with Detailed Specifications. Country of Origin, where listed, must be complied. 1.
MDBs / SMDBs / DBs / MCCs / Changeover Panel / Isolator SR. 1. 2. 3.
MAKE ABB Siemens Schneider
ENCLOSURE Logstrup Siemens Schneider
(Assembled and tested only by the above respective Authorized Local Agent)
2.
Cables and Accessories
Ducab Riyad Cables Oman Cables Jeddah Cables
3.
Cable trays / Ladders Wire Baskets
Wiremold - UK OBO Bettermann – Germany Wibe – Sweden Cablofil – France
4.
Cable Trunking
Barton Wiremold MK OBO Bettermann
5.
Heat Resistant Cable (≥ 90 ºC)
Tekab Draka Riyadh Cables Ducab Pirelli
Page 22 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
6.
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Wiring accessories Make
White plastic
Slimline metal finish
MK MEM Legrand Clipsal
Aspect Spectra grid Mosaic Mega 2000
Contactum
Grid
insignia Ultra Synergy modern Gains Borough classic Flat Plate
7.
GI Box
Barton Decoduct Appleby Clipsal Elektra
8.
PVC conduits and Accessories
Decoduct Marshall Tufflex Clipsal
9.
G.I. Conduit and fittings
Barton Maruchi Walsal WM Interface
10.
PVC Coated Flexible GI Conduit
Kopex Adaptaflex Lappcable WM Interface
11.
Fire Alarm System
Simplex - USA Edwards – Canada Gent – 34000 - UK Notifier - USA Siemens – USA
12.
Fire Alarm Cable
Pirelli Firetuff GST Cavicell
13.
Earthing system, Lightning Protection System, Electronic Systems Protection, Surge Arrestors
14.
Emergency Lighting System
Prazissa - Germany GFS - Germany Cooper CEAG – Germany Enotec - Germany
15.
Capacitor Banks
Comar Schneider
Furse A. N. Wallis Erico Kingsmill
Page 23 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
ABB Nokian Capacitors 16.
Isolators
Moeller ABB Schneider GE Siemens
17.
Structured Cables / Fibre Optic
Corning – Corning - ME Nordex – Alpha Data Avaya–Telematics / Faronics Siemon – Beta Krone - IAL
18.
PA / Music System
Merlaude - France Bosch – Holland Bouyer – Germany
19.
Coaxial Cables
Raydex Belden Commscope Hrishman
20.
CCTV System / DVMR
21.
Intelligent Lighting Control System
Siemens – EIB Clipsal – C – Bus ABB - EiB F & G - EiB
22.
Variable Frequency Drives / Soft Starters
ABB Siemens Allen Bradley Moeller Danfoss
23.
Dimming System
Lutron Helvar Electrosonic Quantran Polaron Futronics
24.
Generator
Dawson Keith - UK Caterpillar - USA F.G Wilson - UK
25.
Cable Glands / Lugs
BICC Ducab Connect
Vicon–UK/USA Bosch – Holland Siemens – USA Bewator – UK Group 4 - USA
Page 24 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
HAWKE CMP 26.
UPS System
Schneider – France Liebert – Italy Chloride – France GE – Swiss AROS - Italy
27.
Access Control System
ADC Technology - Singapore DSX – USA Bewator – UK Siemens-Germany Group 4 - USA
28.
Nurse Call System
Dukane Intercall Ackermann Executon Simplex
29.
Audio / Visual System
Sony JVC Panasonic
30.
Explosion proof Accessories
Legrand Simplex
31.
Clock System
Simplex Dukane
32.
Light Fittings
Refer Schedule of light fittings
*-------------------- * -------------------- * Note : All Fire related Materials e.g. Fire Alarm, Fire Fighting, Fire Stop Materials, Central Emergency Lighting, Fire Dampers etc., must have Local Civil Defence Deptt. approval.
Page 25 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
Page 1 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
SECTION 2
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES- INDEX
1.0
LOCAL SWITCHES
2.0
POWER OUTLETS
3.0
FUSE CONNECTION UNITS/DP SWITCHES
4.0
GI BOXES
5.0
ACCESSORIES PLATE FINISH
6.0
MARKING AND LABELING
7.0
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
Page 2 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
1.0
LOCAL SWITCHES
1.1
The local switches shall be 20 amp. grid type one-way, two-way, intermediate or double pole as indicated on the drawings. Where more than one switch is indicated at any position multiple gang units shall be used.
1.2
Switches shall be of the quick start make, slow break type specially designed for AC circuits to BS Standards. The operation of the switch shall not depend wholly on the action of the spring. The switches shall generally be of the rocker operated type.
1.3
All switch boxes shall be supplied with adjustable steel grids and earthing terminals.
1.4
Generally, switch units shall be of the adjustable grid pattern and to be secured to the adjustable grid by means of screws. For flush mounting switches the switch-plate shall overlap all edges of the box by not less than 7mm. For surface mounting switches the switchplate shall finish flush with the edges of the switch boxes. Switches for water heaters and fan coil units shall be complete with neon indicator lights.
1.5
In Plant rooms the switch units shall be surface or flush as required.
1.6
Local switches shall be arranged in convenient positions for switching the various circuits and generally as indicated on the drawings.
1.7
The switches shall be of the same manufacture for a particular type of switch throughout the installation. All accessories in wet and damp areas shall be of the splashproof type to IP54 protection standard.
1.8
All switch boxes should be galvanised steel.
1.9
To ensure easy and correct connection of the conductors during installation, the necessary terminal shall be easily identified, grouped inline, upward facing, captive and backed out prior to the installation.
2.0
POWER OUTLETS
2.1
The switch socket outlets, shall be in accordance with BS Standard as appropriate and shall be of the three pin grounding type.
2.2
Switch socket outlets being fed from essential and UPS sources shall be separately identified with colour coded labels fixed on the plate. All rockers shall be with neon indicators.
2.3
Live contact of the socket shall be completely shuttered such that it is not possible to engage any pin of the plug into a live contact whilst any other pin of the plug is exposed.
2.4
All floor mounted socket outlets shall be fixed as part of the under floor trunking service boxes.
2.5
These outlets shall be of the same manufacturer throughout the installation.
2.6
The sockets shall have dual earth terminals as per BS 7671, 2001, Regulation 607. The sockets shall also have the facility to connect clean earth. Page 3 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
3.0
FUSE CONNECTION UNITS/DP SWITCHES
3.1
These shall be of flush or surface mounting type as manufactured in compliance with BS Standard as appropriate. The fuse connection units shall incorporate integral switch, neon indicator and 13 amp fuse links. The 20A DP switches shall be with flex outlet in base and neon indication lights.
3.2
These shall be of the same manufacturer for a particular type of switch throughout the installation and shall be complete with the other accessories installed.
4.0 4.1
GI BOXES GI boxes to be provided with brass earth terminal to facilitate earth wire connection. The boxes to have sufficient number of 20mm and 25mm knockout and shall comply with BS 4662. Boxes to have adjustable lug for proper installations of wiring accessories. Extension ring to be used along with GI boxes, in places where the box is deep inside the wall, marble or concrete.
5.0
ACCESSORIES PLATE FINISH
5.1
All the wiring accessories shall be vandal proof. The accessories plate shall have the following finishes depending on the location where it is installed and on the feeding arrangement. Accessories shall be polished chrome type in all areas except as listed below : -
Accessories in plantrooms shall be metal clad type, and above false ceiling and inside floor service boxes shall be white polycarbonate.
-
Accessories in wet areas and as indicated on drawings shall be weatherproof to IP66.
-
All external outlets shall be weatherproof to IP-66.
-
Weatherproof range shall be suitable for semi recessed mounting and supplied with back boxes.
-
Isolators shall be IP65 for outdoor and plantroom installations
-
Isolators feeding the fire and safety equipments (such as fire pumps, lifts, smoke extract fans, basement ventilation fans, etc) shall be fire rated for 120 min.
-
Accessories in Medical gas rooms and in the Oxygen tank yard shall be explosion proof type.
-
All switch plates including SSOs are to be coordinated with tiling layouts by prior agreement with the Architect on site.
-
All sockets within bed head units (other than patient rooms) shall be poly carbonate
Page 4 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
6.0
PART B - SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
MARKING AND LABELING All circuits for lighting and power sockets shall be labeled and marked. A dedicated label shall be engraved at the socket front face, another label shall be provided at the back side of wiring accessory All UPS sockets shall be provided in different color (RED)
7.0
MOUNTING HEIGHTS Mounting heights of accessories shall be as detailed on Architectural drawings and in compliance with statutory authority requirements. Installation shall be carried out as detailed in fit-out plans. Proper co-ordination shall be ensured with relevant subtrades for installation of accessories on furniture, medical service panels and the like. All necessary containment and backboxes shall be provided to form a complete installation to the approval of the Engineer. Such containment shall include but not limited to conduits, ducts, raceways, skirting / DADO / Underfloor trunking and boxes, etc. In General, the mounting heights shall be as follows: Lighting Switches Switch socket outlets Flex outlet A/C Flex Outlet Water Heater Kitchen equipments
1200mm top above FLL 450mm bottom above FLL near to unit near to Water Heater. as per kitchen layout drawings
Note: The 20A double pole switch shall be manufactured to BS 3676 Part 1 1989 and shall be fitted with neon indicator. The double pole switch supplied for the water heaters shall be engraved ‘Water Heater’.
Page 5 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 3 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR
SECTION 3 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR
Page 1 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 3 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR
SECTION 3 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR INDEX
1.0
SCOPE OF WORK
2.0
CHARACTERISTICS OF GENERATOR – GENERAL
3.0
DIESEL ENGINE AND ANCILLARIES
4.0
TESTING
5.0
FUEL SYSTEM
6.0
SOUND INSULATION OF THE ROOM
7.0
EXHAUST
8.0
BATTERY
9.0
CABLES
10.0
SELECTION
11.0
BMS INTERFACE
Page 2 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B - SECTION 3 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR
SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall supply , install , test and commission a prime generating set with separate fuel tank of suitable capacity to run the set for 9 hours at rated conditions. The set shall be complete with all ancillary plant such as starting , fuel , fuel pump, fill in point, fuel piping, exhaust , cooling , control and alarm panels , circuit breaker interconnecting wiring , cabling and all other equipment required for the operation of the sets as per but not limited to this specification .
2.0
CHARACTERISTIC (general) OF THE GENERATOR SETS Ratings
2.1
Output
-
400V , 50 Hz ,1500 Rpm ,0.8 p.f., 1850 KVA 3 phase.
Ambient temperature capability
50 degree centigrade . ( Manufacturer’s deration curves shall be provided )
Maximum speed
1500 Rpm
-
If the site rating is less than stated rating then a detailed derating chart from the manufacturer shall be provided. The offered gensets shall be suitable for installation in closed purpose built generator room. 2.2
Standards The equipment and components shall comply with all relevant British / ISO / IEC standard Specifications. The machines shall be suitable for installation in an enclosed, ventilated engine room shown on the relevant drawings.
2.3
DRAWINGS Reference Drawings : Basement - 1 power layout and Electrical schematic diagram.
2.3.1
The drawings are for tender purposes only and are to be read in conjunction with this Specification. Any discrepancy between the drawings and the Specification and any matter which requires clarification shall be referred to the Engineer during tender period. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of detailed installation drawings for the complete works including associated builders work, and shall submit all drawings to the Engineer for approval prior to the commencement of any work. Approval of such drawings by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide an installation suitable in dimension, construction, function and finish for the purpose intended. Page 3 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 3 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR
This Specification and the Drawings are intended to indicate generally the arrangement of apparatus required, but the Contractor will be deemed to have included in his tender anything necessary to leave the installation complete and in proper working order to the satisfaction of the Engineer whether or not such items are mentioned in the Specification or shown on the Drawings. 3.0
DIESEL ENGINE AND ANCILLARIES
3.1
Diesel engine The diesel engine shall be 4-stroke, either normally aspirated or supercharged and aftercooled, water cooled, equipped with the following : -
3.2.
Heavy duty air-cleaner, with service indicators Crank case breather Lubricating - oil engine driven pump Lubricating - oil simplex filter, with replaceable elements Lubricating - oil cooler Engine - driven jacket water pump Fuel filter, with service indicators Flexible fuel lines Fuel priming pump Dry exhaust manifold, fitting and flange Flywheel and flywheel housing Governor, Electronic Manual and automatic shut-off Oil pressure gauge Cooling water temperature gauge Digital Tachometer Electric starting - 24VDC.
Air filters Air filters shall be suitable for use in the environmental conditions which are likely to arise occasionally, with the atmosphere highly polluted by blown sand. They shall be fitted with an ‘Air filter condition’ indicator of the vacuum type which shall be fitted to the air inlet manifold.
3.3
Cooling Thermostatically controlled bypass valves shall be fitted to the engine cooling water system to maintain cooling water at optimum temperature.
3.4
Governor The governor shall be Electronic type. It shall control the speed within the limits laid down in the respective Standards.
3.5
Engine shut - off. The engine shall be fitted with a mechanically operated device which will shut off the fuel supply to the engine when any of the specified alarm conditions occur. The device Page 4 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 3 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR
shall be fitted with one normally open and one normally closed contact which will trip and lock-out the generator circuit breaker in the event of the automatic device operating. Micro switches shall not be used in any direct current circuit nor in any inductive circuit. 3.6
Starting System The electric starting equipment shall be so designed that :-
3.7
(a)
at engine speeds in excess of the minimum firing speed it shall be impossible to complete the starting circuit and
(b)
not more than three consecutive attempts to start may be made in any period of 1 minute, each starting period and the period between such consecutive attempts being automatically timed controlled by the equipment. At the failure of the third attempt the starter circuit shall be locked out pending manual resetting.
Generator The generator shall be of the brushless, revolving field, solid - state exciter type, single bearing construction, directly coupled to and sharing a common high bed plate with diesel engine and the radiator. The generator shall be complete with all necessary cooling fans, excitation and voltage regulating equipment. The excitation system shall not include a commutator. The generator shall be star connected. The generator shall be capable of maintaining the continuous maximum rated output when operating within +/- 1% of rated voltage and at rated power factor. The critical speed shall exceed twice the overspeed test value. All windings shall be tropicalised and suitably impregnated to withstand the site ambient conditions. The generator shall meet the following requirements : IEC 34/1 standard requirements Class H insulation with tropicalisation and anti-abrasion Three - phase sensing. Drip - proof enclosure, IP22 Pilot shaft alignment 150 % over speed capability. Less than 5 % wave form deviation Standard paralleling capability Volts per Hertz, generator mounted, digital automatic voltage regulator, three phase sensing , assuring less than +/- 1% voltage regulation Adjustable voltage droop for parallel operation Adjustable voltage gain to compensate for engine speed droop and line loss. Less than 50 Telephone Influence Factor (TIF) Less than 3% Total Harmonics Factor (THF) Radio interference suppressed to the limits specified in BS 800 The generator shall also be equipped with manual voltage control. Page 5 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
3.7.1
PART B - SECTION 3 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR
Exciter The core and poles of the exciter shall be made of high permeability low loss steel stamping tightly clamped and secured to minimize magnetic noise. The characteristics of the exciter shall comply fully with the operational requirements of the alternator in matching the required loading conditions. PM excited generators shall be provided.
3.7.2
Ventilation of generator and exciter. The generator and exciter shall incorporate shaft mounted fans of sufficient capacity to provide the machine cooling effects necessary to comply with the temperature requirements of the Specification when operating in the specified ambient conditions.
3.7.3
Voltage Regulation Continuously active, quick acting automatic excitation control equipment responsive to the generator line to line voltage and loading conditions shall be provided to maintain the alternator voltage within the prescribed limits. Equipment will be based wholly on static state devices. Variable Regulation capability regulators shall be preferred. Diode monitor and loss of excitation protection shall be provided. The equipment shall include all selector switches, indicating instruments, rectifiers, resistors and any other auxiliary components necessary for the satisfactory opeation of the plant. A voltage setting device capable of adjusting the required voltage in steps of 1 volt between the limits of 90% and 110% of normal voltage at any load within the rating of the machine shall be mounted on the control panel.
3.8
When the generator maximum continuous load at rated power factor is rejected, the regulator equipment shall be capable of limiting the generator momentary over voltage to a value not exceeding 125% rated voltage and shall restore the voltage to within 1% of the nominal present value within 3 seconds. Over-voltage/undervoltage and overexcitation protection shall be provided. Set Mountings The diesel engine, the generator and exciter, and the radiator shall be mounted a common welded steel bedplate. Where flange mounted generators are not employed, the bedplates shall be stress relieved before machining. Lifting points shall be provided on the bedplate. Suitable anti-vibration mounting shall be supplied for the diesel generator unit, and all set mounted ancillary apparatus. Flexible connections shall be provided to all exhaust, air, fuel and water piping to avoid fracture due to vibration and to minimize conduction of noise. Any necessary foundation bolts shall be supplied under this Contract.
3.9
Safety Guards. All moving parts shall be adequately guarded in accordance with BS 1649 and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, in order to prevent danger to personnel. Page 6 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
3.10
PART B - SECTION 3 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR
Generator set control equipment The control equipment is designed to start and stop the set automatically from a remote signal. The signal will be issued by the Automatic mains failure panel as described elsewhere. The generator set control equipment shall be set mounted and shall be based on microprocessor based system to provide maximum system flexibility The control function shall be provided with an OFF/ MANUAL/AUTO/COOLDOWN STOP switch.
3.10.1 The following digital measuring instruments with liquid crystal display shall be fitted : -
an ammeter - 3 phase a voltmeter - 3 phase a 3 position ammeter/voltmeter selector switch a frequency meter, in Hz and rpm an hours - run meter. power factor meter Coolant Temperature KW (total & per phase) KVA , KVAR , KW-Hr meter Oil Pressure System Diagnostic
3.10.2 Automatic shut-down and lock-out circuits shall be fitted for : -
low oil pressure Over voltage/Under voltage Low coolant level Over current Reverse power
3.10.3 Indicator lamps shall be fitted, together with a lamp-test push-button for : -
low oil pressure shut down high water temperature shut-down overspeed sit-down failure to start/overcrank Emergency stop Fault shutdown/Alarm. 2 spare external faults.
3.10.4 A manually re-set, master shut-down relay shall be provided on the control panel, so arranged that upon the occurrence of the specified fault conditions the relay shall automatically :(a) (b) (c) (d)
break the closing circuit of the circuit-breaker. make the tripping circuit of the circuit-breaker. stop the engine. close the voltage free contact for a remote alarm. Page 7 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 3 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR
Simultaneously, an audible alarm shall be given, and the cause of the stoppage shall be displayed and remain displayed on the control panel and the building management system until the alarm device is manually re-set. When the control selector switch is in the AUTO position, the audible alarm shall be operative. The control panel shall have a self-diagnostic feature to asses the condition of the various senders and sensing components. An adjustable run on “off load” timer, shall be fitted to provide cool down running. All individual circuits such as voltmeter, shutdown circuits etc. shall be adequately protected by fuses. All control wiring shall be carried out in PVC insulated cable termination and relative terminals shall be clearly marked. Engine wiring shall be protected by non-metallic conduit. The control equipment shall also include a breaker as shown on drawings complete with short-circuit magnetic and thermal overload trips, separately housed in a sheet steel enclosure adjacent to the control panel. A shunt trip & Auxiliary contacts shall also be provided. A separate enclosure fixed on the breaker, enclosure with busbars extending from the breaker shall be provided and the outgoing power cables shall be terminated on the busbars. Separate busbar cubicle must be provided to enable termination of multicore cables. 4.0
TESTING The set shall be subjected to the following works tests at the factory prior to Shipment. All Certificates must be submitted for prior approval. The same tests shall be repeated at the Supplier’s local facility before delivery the set to site. (1)
General inspection of equipment to check its compliance with specification
(2)
Timed Start from operation of push button to acceptance of full load.
(3)
1/2 hour 50 % load 1 hour 100 % load
(4)
Determination of voltage and frequency regulations under following load changes : (a) (b)
No load to 110 % load in steps not exceeding 25% 100 % load to no load in a single step .
(5)
Operation of all protection circuits by simulation.
(6)
Operation of UPS fed loads on normal and generator supply (after installation at site and commissioning). Page 8 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
5.0
PART B - SECTION 3 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR
Fuel System Fuel tank with capacity suitable for 24 hours 100% operation shall be made of stainless steel sheets and fuel pipework shall be with MS pipes and fittings. The tank shall be supplied and installed, fully piped up, to provide the service requirements of the genset and as shown on drawings The tank shall be complete with filler cap, contents gauge, overflow pipe, vent pipe and sludge valve. The fuel tank shall be filled as required for testing and commissioning and shall be full at the time of handing over.
6.0
Sound insulation of the room and Vibration Criteria The contractor shall provide sound level data of the proposed equipment for review of the Engineer. The noise level outside the genset room shall not exceed 75 dBA at 3 meters. Attenuators shall be provided for radiator discharge and air intake. The air intake requirements shall be coordinated at site. The generator base mounted springs shall be able to absorb 95% of the Engine vibrations. Any louvers provided in generator room shall be of the acoustic type.
7.0
Exhaust All exhaust gases shall be suitably piped outside the genset room . The engine shall be efficiently, silenced and be complete with a silencer and all fixings to attach the silencer to the generator room ceiling. In addition to erecting the silencer the Contractor shall also be responsible for providing and erecting the fittings necessary to carry the tail pipe through the generator room wall. All fixings shall be anti-vibration type where required and galvanized. Exhaust pipes of the proper diameter, properly insulated with 50 thk rockwool insulation and clad with 22G aluminum sheet, shall be supplied and installed. They shall run from the exhaust silencers to the outside . The exhaust pipes shall terminate with an adequate bend or cap to prevent ingress of rain. The total exhaust noise attenuation shall be to 25dBA.
8.0
BATTERY STARTING The equipment shall include an adequately rated maintenance free lead acid starter battery together with a suitably rated charger. The battery charger shall be supplied from the mains (standby supply) and an engine driven dynamo shall be used for boost charging . The battery shall be protected against accidental, mechanical or electrical damage and shall be housed in a purpose built rack. The charger shall be mounted remote from the engine and shall include a battery charge fail alarm. Without power supply to the charger, the battery shall be capable of providing no fewer than four starting cycles within a period of 5 minutes. Upon restoring power supply to the charger immediately thereafter, the charger shall be capable of restoring the battery, within 30 minutes, to a condition in which one more starting cycle can be completed. The following instrumentation and protection shall be provided :
Page 9 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
9.0
PART B - SECTION 3 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR
*
Charger failure
*
Battery voltmeter
*
Charge / discharge ammeter.
*
On/off switch.
CABLES All cables shall be supplied in accordance with local Electricity Authority and Civil Defence regulations . A schedule of loads and cable sizes shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to commencement of any work.
10.0
SELECTION Contractor shall provide detailed calculation and load shedding scheme to match the capacity of the specified generator.
11.0
BMS INTERFACE The Generator Control panel shall be equipped with necessary hardware and software for integration with BMS for monitoring the following items : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Voltage Frequency Load Current Diesel level. Generator status (Auto / Manual). High water temperature alarm. High water temperature shutdown. Low oil pressure alarm. Low oil pressure shutdown. Fail to start shutdown. Overspeed shutdown. System diagnostic shutdown. Battery Status.
Page 10 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
Page 1 of 13
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION INDEX 1.0
MAIN LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD – FORM 4
2.0
TESTS
3.0
DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION
4.0
AUTO CHANGE OVER PANEL
5.0
SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD
6.0
FINAL DISTRIBUTION BOARD
7.0
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
8.0
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
9.0
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
10.0
EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER
11.0
CONTACTORS / OVERLOAD RELAYS / CONTROL RELAYS / TIMERS
12.0
INDICATION LAMPS / PUSH BUTTONS / SELECTOR SWITCHES
13.0
SITE CONDITION
14.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
15.0
SWITCH BOARD OPERATORS MAT
16.0
VOLT METER AND AMMETER
17.0
COORDINATION
18.0
ENERGY MONITORING UNIT
19.0
THERMAL IMAGING
Page 2 of 13
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
1.0
Main Low Voltage Switchboard and Main Distribution Boards – Form–4b Type-6
1.1
The main LV Switchboard shall be of a free standing, cubicle type modular construction system conforming to fully type tested designs, incorporating ACB's, MCCB's busbars, fuses, measuring equipment etc. all as required and complying to the latest editions of BS EN 61439-1. The switchboard shall be from a reputed manufacturer with an established and IEC 439 - 1 certified quality assurance system to ISO 9001. Non certified manufacturers will not be acceptable. All circuit breakers and busbar ratings shall be as per the load schedules and drawings. All circuit breakers and busbars shall be rated for 50°C. All auxiliary power supplies shall be provided as per the manufacturer's requirement.
1.2
Design & Construction:
1.2.1
Switchboard construction shall be designed to FORM 4, Type 7 standards for panels as shown on drawings in accordance with IEC 439-1/ BS EN 61439-1. Busbars shall be in a separate chamber, fully segregated from the rest of the switchboard. Additional insulating material shall be provided behind the doors/plates of the busbar chamber. Individual functional units shall be located in independent compartments.
1.2.2
In addition to compliance with FORM 4 standards, the switchboard shall be successfully tested for safe containment of an internal arcing fault. Suitable ducts and vents for individual functional units and busbars shall be incorporated in the switchboard to safely divert the resultant over pressure and arcing away from the operator and adjacent functional units. Allowing the gases to escape through the door into the cable way or out through the back of the board will not be acceptable.
1.2.3
The switchboard shall be of a modular construction and be extendable on both sides. Welded construction switchboards will not be accepted. The degree of protection shall be at least IP 42 as defined in IEC 529.
1.2.4
Enclosures shall be made of sheet steel. The basic framework should be roll-formed from 1.6 to 2mm electro-galvanised steel coated with high-solid enamel, polyester electrostatic spray and oven baked. The doors and panels shall be iron-phosphate steel, coated like the framework but also with primer. The color shall be RAL 7032 (light grey) or equal. The base frame shall be of minimum 3mm thick Electro galvanized steel.
1.2.5
Compartments shall be easily accessible for maintenance purposes. Barriers shall be included between each compartment to contain an internal fault as defined in BS / IEC standards to ensure safe maintenance on any outgoing circuit when the remainder of the board is alive. Each compartment shall be provided with a separately fixed thermostat controlled heater at the bottom.
1.2.6
The maximum height of the enclosure shall be 2400 mm. All meters, lamps, operating handles shall be within a maximum height of 2000 mm. All dimensions shall be of uniform appearance. All live conductors shall be shielded in such a manner that they cannot be accidentally touched when the doors are open. All doors and plates shall be interchangeable and may be hinged left, right, top and bottom as standard. Doors shall be provided with an integral gasket and earth stud and a range of locks to meet all regulations. Page 3 of 13
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
1.2.7
All internal separations shall be from standard pre-fabricated plates. The usage of Bakelite, fiber sheets or any other material to provide internal separation will not be acceptable. The internal separation between compartments and sections shall be at least IP 40.
1.2.8
Suitable cableways shall be provided for each functional unit section. There shall be front access for cabling purposes. It shall be possible to safely terminate or work on the outgoing cables of any functional unit without having to switch off the main breaker or adjacent functional units. Switchboards shall be suitable for bottom or top cable entry as specified. All openings and entries shall be vermin proof. Switchboards shall be arranged such that safe access (front, rear, side) may be readily obtained. Adjustable gland plates, adequate channel frames and cable clamps for cable supports shall be provided.
1.3
Busbars:
1.3.1
Busbars shall be of rectangular cross section HDHC tinned copper and suitably rated for continuos operation. The main busbar rating shall be the same throughout the entire length of the switchboard. The busbars and primary connections shall comply with BS 159. The surface temperature of the busbar shall not exceed 85°C over an ambient of 50°C. Connections to incoming circuit breakers shall be of the same rating.
1.3.2
Busbars shall be installed in a separate chamber and shall run along the whole length of the switchboard, which allows for easy extension in the future. Vertical droppers if any, shall run behind each functional unit section. Busbars shall be rigidly supported along their entire length. The busbar supports shall be of a high-grade polymer. The mechanical and dielectric strength of the busbars and supports shall be capable of withstanding the worst fault conditions and as per ASTA testing requirements.
1.3.3
The main busbar system shall be of a parallel 2 bar per phase arrangement . All switchboards shall be complete with a neutral and earth bar running along the full length of the panel. The cross section of the neutral bar shall be same as that of the phase conductor and that of the earth bar is at least half the size as that of the phase bar.
1.3.4
Busbars and connections shall be color coded for phase identification and shall conform to the phase sequence R-Y-B, counting from left to right ,upper to lower and from near to remote when viewed from the operating side of the switchboard.
1.3.5
Under no circumstances will common earth / neutral bar be acceptable. Earth bars, neutral bars and links shall be so located and mounted that access to them is not obstructed by the structure or wiring of the switchboard and so that all outgoing neutral and earth conductors can be readily and safely connected and disconnected without moving other cables or disconnecting the incoming supply to the switchboard.
1.3.6
The main busbar shall be certified to withstand a fault level of at least 50KA for 1 second. This certificate shall be from ASTA or an independent and recognized testing authority.
1.4
Panel wiring / Terminal Blocks / Labels:
1.4.1
All internal and control wiring shall be 600 / 1000V PVC insulated stranded copper cable to BS 6231. All cables shall be adequately rated and not less than 2.5 sq.mm. , run on PVC cables trays .. Each cable shall be properly terminated at both ends with loops. When wiring is across door hinges, it shall be enclosed by a flexible PVC tubing and be looped to Page 4 of 13
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
permit the opening of doors and removal of components for inspection. Plastic ferrules with correct numbers shall be fitted on all wires to correspond with circuit number and diagram. 1.4.2
Terminal blocks for power and control wiring shall be of Cage Clamp connection technique in which the only tool required is a flat – bladed screwdriver .Once the conductor is inserted ,the stainless steel cage clamp shall automatically provide the correct clamping force for a secure connection. Screws terminals shall not be used. Cables having the same number shall be terminated at adjacent terminals and connected by means of cable jumpers at the terminal block. Terminal blocks shall be grouped according to the working voltage, power circuit and control circuit. 10% of spare terminals and not less than two numbers shall be provided on each group of terminal block.
1.4.3
All Circuit breakers, Feeders' etc. shall be provided with labels of adequate dimensions. Labels shall be of traffolyte having a white background with engraved letters. They shall be screw fixed on the panel.
1.5
Metering and indication:
1.5.1
The Mains supply incomer shall be provided with ammeter, a voltmeter and RYB phase indication lamps. KWH meter shall be provided and shall be of an approved type and make by the Utility. Ammeters and voltmeters shall be as specified elsewhere.
1.5.2
Indicating lamps shall be of the long life LED type. They shall be connected through individually fused circuits tapped from the outgoing side of the main switch.
1.5.3
Internal and auxiliary wiring shall be of the 600/1000V grade with a minimum cross section of 2.5-sq. mm.
1.5.4
For the generator supply incomer circuit breaker, the following meters and indication shall be provided:
2.0
(a)
Digital Ammeters
(b)
Digital Voltmeter
(c)
Frequency meter 45-60 Hz range
(d)
Hour run meter
(e)
Power factor meter
(f)
kW meter
(g)
Indicating lamps to indicate each phase live (red, yellow & blue).
Tests: The panels shall undergo the following tests in the factory before despatch: a)
Primary Injection Test for all Circuit Breakers.
b)
Secondary Test for all protective relays and meters, CT polarity tests.
c)
Millivolt Drop Test
d)
HV Test 2.5kV for 1 min. Page 5 of 13
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
e)
Insulation test
f)
Function Test
PART B - SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
These tests shall be carried out in presence of the Consultant. 3.0
Drawings and Information: The vendor shall furnish following submittal after placement of order: i)
General Arrangement drawing showing front view, plan, foundation plan ,floor cutouts and trenches for external cables , elevations, transport sections and weights.
ii)
Sectional drawings of various types of feeders, panels showing general constructional features, mounting details of various devices, busbars, current transformers, cable boxes, terminal boxes for control cables etc.
iii)
Schematic and control wiring diagrams for each type of feeder and protection including indicating devices, metering instruments, alarms, space heaters etc.
iv)
Terminal plan showing terminal numbers, ferrule markings ,device terminal numbers, functions etc. and
v)
Control wiring diagrams.
Vendor shall provide a copy of the above drawings for approval and a copy of the as built drawings for records. The information furnished shall include the following: i)
Technical literature giving complete information of the equipment.
ii)
Erection, Operation and maintenance manual complete with all relevant information, drawings and literature for auxiliary equipment and accessories, characteristics for relays etc.
iii)
An equipment list with detailed specifications and make.
4.0
Auto Change Over Panel
4.1
General The Automatic Transfer switch shall be of mechanically and electrically interlocked type to exclude any possibility of coupling together the normal and emergency sources. To ensure continuity of service both air circuit breakers shall have two stable position, Closed and Open. It shall be possible to manually operate each air circuit breaker (or unprotected circuit breaker) in the event of the absence of control voltage. For maintenance purpose, the transfer switches shall have a neutral position with both air circuit breakers in the Open position. It shall also be possible to lock each air circuit breaker in the Open position. Page 6 of 13
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
Each air circuit breaker (or unprotected circuit breaker) of the transfer switch shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts and alarm contacts (Tripped status indication). 4.2
Construction Operations of the air circuit breakers (or unprotected circuit breaker) shall be by individual momentarily energized motor on each breaker. The mechanical interlock for 2 air circuit breakers side by side may be achieved with two cables. ATS switch shall be equipped with microprocessors / PLC based controller to carry out the following functions : a.
Switching from one source to another depending on the presence of voltage on the transformer / generator.
b.
Control of engine generating set.
c.
Load shedding and reconnection of non priority circuits.
d.
Switching to the generator source in the event of failure of normal source.
e.
Circuit breaker status indications shall be displayed in front of the controller (On / Off fault).
f.
Test push button shall be provided on the front of the controller to check the transfer from normal to emergency and return to normal source.
g.
Controller shall be equipped with adjustment of time delays infront.
5.0
Sub Main Distribution Board:
5.1
The panel board shall be wall mounting type constructed to BS EN 61439, Form-2b Type-2 requirements. It shall be constructed of minimum 2mm thick electro-galvanised steel coated with high solid enamel polyester electrostatic spray and oven baked. The color shall be RAL 7032 (light grey). The degree of protection of the board shall be IP54. Submain panel boards shall be provided with minimum 2 no. pad locks with locks and key.
5.2
Busbars shall be of hard drawn, high conductivity tinned copper and rated for continuos operation. The phase bar, neutral bar and earth bar shall be identified by approved colour codes. The neutral bar shall be of the same cross section as the phase bus bar. A sub feed neutral assembly with a removable link for isolation shall be available as an integral part of the Distribution board. Earthing bar assembly shall also be available to facilitate the connection of earth continuity conductors.
5.3
All Circuit breakers , Metering and Busbar ratings shall be as per the load schedules and drawings.The main MCCB and the feeder breakers shall be of appropriate capacity.
5.4
Panel wiring, Terminal blocks and labels shall be as specified for the Main Distribution Boards.
Page 7 of 13
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
5.5
Tests to be conducted on the SMDB before despatch and the Drawings to be furnished shall be the same as specified for Main Distribution Boards.
6.0
MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
6.1
Description
6.1.1
The specification hereunder shall be applied to al panel boards referenced on the drawings/load schedules as DB's. The distribution board shall be flush / surface mounted split busbar type and shall be provided with standard extension box to allow cable glanding if required. The distribution board shall be surface mounted when installed within the electrical room/service rooms. Distribution boards shall be provided with an isolator incomer with common ELCB’s for group of lighting circuits and common ELCB’s for group of power circuits for each section of MCB’s or RCBO’s for each power circuit as shown on schedules.
6.1.3
As a standard item, all MCB boards shall be provided with permanent circuit identification charts to the approval of the engineer.
6.1.4
MCB’s shall comply with IEC – 898 and RCBO’s shall comply with BSEN 61009. ELCB’s shall comply with BSEN 61008.
6.2
Enclosures
6.2.1
The MCB Distribution Boards shall be surface/flush mounted type. The enclosures within Electrical rooms shall be surface mounting type. The enclosures shall be powder coated rustproof sheet steel units, complete with circuit breakers providing thermal overload and magnetic short-circuit and earth fault protection as shown on the drawings. The enclosure protection shall be IP 31, while the complete assembly shall comply with IEC – 439-1.
6.3
Busbar
6.3.1
The MCBs shall be mounted on either 3 phase or single phase or split busbars as appropriate. All spaces which are not provided with breakers shall be covered with blank plates.
6.3.2
A final sub-circuit neutral assembly and an earthing bar assembly shall be available to facilitate the connection of neutral conductors and protective conductors respectively.
6.4
Breakers
6.4.1
Miniature circuit breakers, RCBO’s and earth leakage circuit breaker and shall be provided as indicated on the load schedules.
6.4.2
The short circuit rating for the MCB’s and RCBO’s shall be 10KA.
6.4.3
All circuit breakers shall be factory calibrated to ambient temperature of 50 deg.C.
7.0
Air Circuit Breakers
7.1
Air Circuit Breakers shall be designed and constructed to have a short circuit breaking capacity of not less than 50 kA and shall comply with the latest editions of IEC 947-2 and Page 8 of 13
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
BS 4752. They shall be of the fully withdrawable type and motor operated. ACB On/Off pushbuttons with On/Off indication lamps shall be provided. ACBs shall be 3 or 4 pole type as indicated on drawings. 7.2
Suitable automatic safety shutters shall be provided to cover live parts when the ACB is in the withdrawn position. There shall be 3 distinct positions i.e. "Connected" "Test" "Disconnected-Isolated" There shall also be a "Withdrawn" position.
7.3
ACB's shall have adequately designed Arc chutes and Arc shields for fast and effective Arc chopping. The protective release shall be of the solid state electronic type having protection against overloads, short circuits and ground fault with adjustable time and current settings. The following protections shall be included : (a) Overload protection (LT) (b)
Short-circuit protection (ST)
(c)
Instantaneous short-circuit protection (I)
(d)
Ground fault protection (GF)
7.4
The ACB shall have sufficient auxiliary contacts with a minimum of 2 NO and 2 NC contacts.
8.0
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
8.1
Moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest editions of BS 4752 and IEC 9472. The short circuit breaking capacities of the MCCB's installed in the main LV switchboards shall be at least 50 kA and 35KA in SMDB’s. The MCCBs used on the project shall be of the plug-in type.
8.2
MCCB's shall be of the heavy-duty quick make break type. All MCCB's shall be ambient temperature compensated to give the ratings indicated in the drawings at 50°C for which a formal certificate confirming that MCCB's have been temperature compensated should be furnished. Each breaker shall have on each phase a thermal over current release and also an instantaneous magnetic trip both of the adjustable type. Four pole breakers shall have a common trip both with a single operating handle and designed so that any overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Breakers shall be trip free and each shall have a trip indication independent of ON or OFF positions. To reset from the tripped position the mechanism shall first pass through the off position. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between ON and OFF.
8.3
The MCCB’s in LV MDB’s and MCC’s as shown on drawings shall be withdrawable type.
9.0
Disconnect Switches
9.1
Disconnect switches and isolator shall comply with IEC-947. Page 9 of 13
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
9.2
10.0
PART B - SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
Disconnect switches shall be provided at each motor controller and appliance location . Isolators shall be rated to connect and disconnect 5 to 7 times the rated current of the item being switched. Isolators shall have a fully visual braking characteristic. Isolator enclosures shall be made of aluminium alloy to IP-65 and shall be provided with padlockable handle interlocked with the door. Isolators exposed to weather shall be housed within self-extinguished polyester loaded fiberglass panels to IP65. Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers(ELCB's)
10.1
Current operated Earth leakage Circuit breakers shall comply with BS EN 61008.
10.2
The ELCB's shall have a residual current operated electromechanical release and shall incorporate a filtering device to eliminate unwanted tripping due to transient voltage. A test button is to prove operation of the ELCB. The ELCB's shall have 100mA sensitivity for lighting circuits and 30mA for power circuits.
11.0
Contactors / Overload Relays/ Control Relays/Timers
11.1
Contactors: Contactors shall be in conformance to IEC 947-4 / CSA 22.2 No.14 and shall be CE approved / CSA Certified. The magnets and contact movements of the contactor shall be horizontal. The contacts shall be double break, butt type and each moving contact shall be individually spring loaded. The fixed and moving contacts shall be of silver -cadmium oxide. The contactor coils shall be continuously rated and shall be wound on moulded formers. Contactors shall be factory calibrated, ambient temperature compensated and sealed. It shall be possible to attach the contactors to 35mm DIN Mounting Rail (EN 50 022). Power contactors shall be provided with a minimum of 2 NO and 2 NC Auxiliary contacts. The contactors shall provide greater performance in less panel space. There shall be flexibility in the selection of front mounting or side mounting of auxiliary contacts .The contactor shall design features for IP 2LX finger protection against accidental contact with live components, positive drive contacts and protection against manual operation, Auxiliary and relay contacts shall be compatible with electronic circuits to 17V, 5mA.
11.2
Overload Relays Overload relays shall confirm to IEC 947-4 /CSA C22.2 No 14 and shall be CSA certified / CE approved. The motor overload protection should have a protection choice of trip class 10 or 20. As a standard, the overload relay shall offer a manually operated trip function, visible trip indicator and isolated N.O. alarm contacts are to be used to protect motor circuits against overloads, phase sequence, phase failure (single phasing) and under voltage conditions. The relay range selected shall be such that the full load current of the equipment falls well within the relay adjustment range. The energy consumption of the relay shall be not above 150mW.
11.3
Control Relays Page 10 of 13
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
Control relays shall conform to IEC 255-10-00 and shall be CSA certified. Control relays shall be of plug in type and shall have built in LED’s. They shall have miniature square bases with blade terminals. The contacts shall be of silver cadmium rated for 5A continuos current. The control relays shall be suitable for wiring with spade type crimped lugs. 11.4
Timers Timers shall conform to IEC 255-1 and shall be CSA certified. Timer relays with adjustable range for the Star delta starter shall ensure precise reproducibility of the timing function. The relay shall be equipped with Single pole double throw 1 Pole change over contact two electrically separated time delayed contact one normally open and one normally close.
12.0 12.1
Indication lamps / Push Buttons / Selector switches. Indicating lamps: The Indicating lamps shall be LED type.
12.2
Push Buttons: Push button shall be flush type with colors in accordance with BS4099. Push Buttons contact blocks shall have double break silver plated contacts in NO / NC configuration rated not less than 5A resistive at 240AC, 50Hz. Push Buttons shall feature a diaphragm seal to protect the button from the entrance of oil , water and other contaminants. Oring seals, which rely on lubricants, shall not be used. Start and stop push buttons shall be of shrouded type. Emergency stop push buttons shall be of maintained contact, pull to reset and lockable at EM-stop to prevent reset. Engraved legend plates shall be fitted with all push buttons.
12.3
Selector switches: Selector switches shall be positive action rotary can switches, which shall incorporate double break contacts. Selector contacts shall be double break and of hard silver alloy. They shall have a minimum continues current rating of 10A and be of a high breaking capacity. The switch positions shall be marked on all engraved legend plates, which shall be made from black, white, black traffolyte, and the minimum character size shall be 3 mm. Operating knobs of the rotary type with lever or key operated actuators. Hands -Off -Auto selector switch shall have three positions with center position as off.
13.0
Site condition: Altitude
: Sea level
Relative Humidity
: 100% Page 11 of 13
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
Design ambient temperature Surface temperature
Rainfall
: Solar radiation may increase surface Temperature up to 80 deg. C. : 54.4 mm maximum per day.
Atmosphere
14.0
: 50 deg. C
: Salipherous atmosphere often containing fine dust and pollutants in particular CO2 and H2S.
Codes and Standards: IEC 38 IEC 50 IEC 51 IEC 59
Standard voltages International Electro technical Vocabulary. Recommendations for indicating electrical measuring instruments Standard current ratings
BSEN 60947-2 IEC 947-2 IEC 158 IEC 185 IEC 186 IEC 255 IEC 269 IEC 277 IEC 292 IEC 337 IEC 341 IEC 408 IEC 439-1
Air Circuit Breaker/ Moulded Case Circuit Breakers. Low voltage control gear Current Transformer. Voltage Transformer Relays LV fuses with high breaking capacity. Definitions for switchgear and control gear. Low voltage motor starter. Control switches. Push button switches Low voltage air break switches, air break disconnectors, air break switch disconnectors and fuse combination units. Factory built assemblies of low voltage switchgear and controlgear
BS EN 61439-1 IEC 445 IEC 446 IEC 529 IEC 898
Identification of equipment terminals and of termination of certain conductors, including general rules of alphanumeric system. Identification of insulated and bare conductor by colors Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures. Miniature Circuit Breaker.
(The equivalent British standards for the above IEC specifications shall also apply)
15.0
VOLT METER AND AMMETER
15.1
Volt meters and ammeter used throughout the project shall be of the digital type and shall be fitted into the front of the panels.
15.2
The meters shall have a dielectric strength of 2KV at 50Hz for 1 minute with 7 segments light emitting diode displays and the figure height shall be 20mm. Page 12 of 13
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
15.3
Meters shall have 4 digits display and shall have an accuracy of 1% or better.
16.0
SWITCHBOARD OPERATOR'S MAT
16.1
All electrical switch cupboards and plantroom switchboard shall be provided with a 1M wide carbon free rubber mat or mats, having a ribbed upper surface and being of such length to suit the full operating extent of each switchboard.
16.2
The insulating mats shall each be certified to have sustained, without failure, a one minute voltage test at 2 KV.
17.0
COORDINATION Complete co-ordination study of the distribution shall be carried out to establish tripping time of breakers at the different levels. Breakers shall be upgraded, if required based on the study, to achieve proper co-ordination without any cost to the Client. The coordination study and short circuit calculations of the complete distribution shall be submitted for the approval of the Engineer.
18.0
ENERGY MONITORING UNIT Digital energy monitoring unit with MODBUS or equivalent communication capabilities shall be provided in each main LV Panel and as shown on drawings and shall be integrated with BMS.
19.0
THERMAL IMAGING Thermal imaging shall be carried out on LV switchgear panel, busbars, bus joints, busbar connection points, tap-off units, etc. before handing over and at the end of maintenance period.
Page 13 of 13
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
SECTION 5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Page 1 of 6
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
SECTION 5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES INDEX
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
SPECIFICATIONS
3.0
INSPECTIONS AND FACTORY TEST
Page 2 of 6
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B - SECTION 5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
GENERAL This Specification describes the requirements for the 400V Variable Frequency Drive Controllers (VFD). The 400V Variable Frequency Drive Controllers shall be designed and provided in accordance with this Specification and the attached data sheets. The proposed Manufacturers installation requirements should be complied by the Manufacturers as part of the Contract including shielded power cables (if required), enclosure for VFD’s, earthing requirements, etc to achieve EMC Compatible installation. All details shall be furnished as part of the submittal. All equipment shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest edition of the applicable: NFPA 70 IEC 146 EN Standard / CE marked for EMC directives: Emissions
Immunity
EN 50081-1
EN 50082-1
EN 50081-2
EN 50082-2
EN 55011 Class A
IEC 801-1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8
EN 55011 Class B
EN 50178
EN 60204-1 The manufacturer shall furnish the product as listed and classified by underwriter’s laboratories as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. The VFD product line shall be capable of operating normally in an environment with an ambient temperature range of 0 °C to 50 °C with a relative humidity of up to 95% (non-condensing). The enclosed current rating shall be derated by 10% for each 5 °C above 50 °C not exceeding 60 °C. The product line shall be capable of being shipped and stored in an environment with an ambient temperature range of 0 °C to 65 °C. The nominal operating altitude shall be less than 1000 m above sea level. Ship controllers in convenient sections crated and protected, bearing in mind the hazards of transportation. All necessary bus connections, wire jumpers, bolts, nuts, etc. shall be suitably packed and identified to facilitate field assembly.
2.0
SPECIFICATIONS
2.1
The variable speed drive controllers’ technical requirements shall be in accordance with the data sheets. Seller shall be responsible for ensuring that under all operating conditions:
Page 3 of 6
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
-
The controllers and their characteristics shall be compatible with their respective driven production motor and the plant control system. Seller shall obtain speed (frequency) range required and maximum frequency permitted for each type of controller from the load equipment supplier.
-
The VFD shall be suitable for use with high efficiency Design B, 400 V motors.
-
The total harmonic distortion (THD) voltage in the plant electrical and local DEWA systems shall not exceed 5% and no individual harmonic shall exceed 3% during normal plant operation.
-
Computerised harmonic analysis studies to IEEE Standard 519; copies of the studies shall be provided with the proposal.
-
The VFD shall be fully digital pulse width modulated type (PWM) using latest generation IGBT’s with isolating contactors and line reactors.
2.2
The VFD controllers shall be suitable for operation on 400 Volt ±15%, 3 phase, 50 Hz input power supply and 0-400 Volt, 3 phase, 0.5 to 400 Hz output. No transformer shall be used on either the input or output of the VFD.
2.3
Each controller shall comprise: -
-
-
Enclosure with filters and gaskets construction, mounted on steel sills. Incoming supply terminals complete with cable lugs. Padlockable line disconnect switch with bolt on HRC fuses in each phase. 110% overload capacity above motor service factor demand (115%) for 30 minutes. Short circuit and current limit protection. Surge (TVSS) protection. Stop/Start contactor to ensure when the motor is not running, no voltage is present on the motor power terminals. Wireways with removable gland plates. Incoming power system isolation transformer, if required, with thermal sensing in each phase, and filters to limit on the plant 400V bus THD to 5%; no single harmonic to be more than 3%. Drive operation man machine interface (MMI) keyboard. Stepless non reversing minimum and maximum motor speed adjustments, adjustable ramp up rates, minimum/maximum speed limits for pump motors. Adjustments to be password protected. Man/Auto select switch via keypad, with locking via password in both positions (see Note). Local/Remote selector switch via keypad with locking via password in both positions (see Note). “Drive Ready” with remote signal. Stop and start pushbuttons via keypad, in remote mode. Speed control: Local/Remote/Automatic via keypad. Motor speed indication via LED display. Motor On/Off indication via LED display. Emergency stop pushbutton, local at controller and local to plant. Drive status and failure diagnostic feature via LED display. Feature to log, time and date the last 30 fault conditions. Indication of output to drive current on each phase. Page 4 of 6
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
-
-
-
-
PART B - SECTION 5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Isolated I/O control signals. Motor multi-function protection, providing short circuit (51), overvoltage (59), undervoltage (27), thermal (49), stalling (49S) and phase unbalance (46) protections, complete with ground fault (51G) protection device to trip the incoming supply. Bolted and shrouded bolted type terminals for terminating load cables. Weidmuller or Wieland type terminal blocks shall be provided to connection of external wiring and cables. Interposing relays as required. 110V AC control voltage or manufacturers standard. Microprocessor based electronic self-diagnostics and fault detection system. Each cubicle shall be provided with a earthing bus, complete with two connectors for connecting to the plant earthing system. Drilled holes shall be provided for connecting cable earth conductor. VFD controllers shall be provided with a lamacoid engraved nameplate, minimum size 150mm x 75mm, engraving details to be provided by Purchaser. The VFD shall have built-in ventilation fan and dust filter. The controller to be remote mounted at front door for manual adjustments and monitoring of parameters. The VFD shall have thermal cut-off provision for the motor over temperature.
In “Man” mode, two modes shall be functional: Local or Remote. In “Local” mode, motor shall be started from Start/Stop pushbuttons via controller’s keypad. In “Remote” mode, motor shall be started from pushbutton station located near motor (if required). 2.4
Performance The VFD shall have the following features as a minimum: -
2.5
Minimum efficiency of 97% at maximum load and speed. Minimum line side displacement power factor of 0.95 to 1.0 logging at all speeds and loads. Adjustable motor frequency of 0 to 400 Hz. Separately adjustable acceleration and deceleration ramps from 0 to 999 seconds. Rotating motor restart feature. Capable of running without a motor connected for set-up and testing. Skip frequency reject point to prevent operating of the equipment at a resonant speed. Ride through for power outage of at least 2 seconds duration Load loss detection Overload protection Auto economizer The flying start feature operable with or without encoder feedback
Discrete Operation Inputs -
Start
-
Stop
Outputs Page 5 of 6
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
2.6
PART B - SECTION 5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
-
Ready to start
-
Running
-
VFD general fault alarm status
-
VFD Auto and Man/Local/Remote operation status
Analog Operation Inputs -
Speed control signal
Outputs
2.7
-
Speed signal feedback
-
Phase currents (percent)
-
Frequency (percent)
Verification of Interface -
3.0
Vendor shall demonstrate functional testing and operational verification of the control interface with the Building Management System via Modbus, Bacnet, LON, or equal as required.
INSPECTIONS AND FACTORY TEST Controllers shall be inspected at all stage of manufacture in accordance with the Seller’s Quality Assurance Program and shall be completely assembled in the works. Seller shall provide a production schedule, which shall give details of the production processes. Seller shall provide a QA Manual, which shall detail the inspections, testing to referenced standards, and burn in at full load at an ambient of 50 °C, for a minimum of 8 hours. All deficiencies shall be corrected before shipment. All metal surfaces that are to be painted or coated shall be cleaned to an equal of a commercial finish as defined in the Steel Structures Painting Council’s manual SSPC-SP6-63, modified to exclude wet sandblasting and painted to manufacturer’s standard finish. Internal surfaces shall be painted white. Nameplates shall be provided for each VFD controller.
Page 6 of 6
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 6 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
SECTION 6 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
Page 1 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 6 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
SECTION 6 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE Index
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
SPECIFICATIONS
3.0
INSPECTIONS AND FACTORY TESTS
Page 2 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1
PART B - SECTION 6 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
GENERAL GENERAL INTRODUCTION This Specification describes the requirements for 400 V motor control centres (MCC). The motor control centres shall be designed and provided in accordance with this Specification and the electrical schematic diagram. The scope of supply includes the design, manufacture, installation, testing and commisioning of the 400 V motor control centres as described above. Equipment unloading and storage at the Job Site. All equipment shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable IEC 439-1, EN 61439-1 form-3b, or form as shown as drawings, IEC 947-4, IEC 801 standards and shall meet the requirements of DEWA. Dedicated MCC’s as mentioned on drawings for pumps shall be form-2, type-2 incomer MCCB (N/A) / Isolator.
with
All MCC’s shall be weather proof to IP-54. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the contract documents, acceptable manufacturer of all materials specified in this section of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar servicer conditions for not less than five years. The Motor Control Centres shall be capable of operating normally in an environment with an ambient temperature range of 0°C to 50°C with relative humidity of up to 95% (non-condensing). The enclosed current rating shall be derated by 10% for each 5°C above 50°C not exceeding 60°C. The MCC shall be capable of being shipped and stored in an environment with an ambient temperature range of 0°C to 65°C. The normal operating altitude shall be less than 1000 m above sea level. 2
Specifications The MCC technical requirements shall be in accordance with the data sheets, single line diagrams and schematics The motor control centres shall be suitable for operation on 400 V, 3-phase, 3 wire, 50 Hz, front mounted, installed on steel channel sills. All power bus bars as well as all other current carrying parts shall be of copper. The main horizontal bus bars shall be insulated and isolated, and rated as indicated in single line diagrams, and shall run continuously the entire length of the control centre, except when it may be necessary to cut and provide splice plates as between shipping sections. The main bus shall be housed in an isolated compartment. Vertical bus bars extending the full height of each section shall be provided. The vertical bus shall be insulated with flame-retardant material. All Page 3 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 6 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
buses shall be braced for 50,000 symmetrical amps RMS short circuit current. All bus assemblies shall be supported by steel framework with insulators of moulded glass polyester. Provision shall be made to extend MCC on either side. Motor control centres shall have a continuous horizontal copper earthing bus installed in the bottom of the MCC. It shall extend through each section of the control centre and shall be provided with compression lugs at each end. Vertical ground bus extending down each vertical section shall also be provided. Incoming sections shall have top entry. Space shall be adequate to accommodate incoming bus ducts supplied by others. MCC Supplier shall coordinate with the main contractor regarding details of bus ducts. Outgoing power and control wiring shall be from top. Each control centre shall be provided with a laminated phenolic nameplate, white outer layers with black centre layer, 75 mm x 200 mm, with bevelled edges. Lettering shall be engraved into the phenolic to produce black letters on a white background. The MCC number shall be in 25 mm high letters and numerals. All other lettering shall be a minimum of 10 mm high. Tabreed equipment and purchase number shall be engraved on the nameplate. The nameplates shall be firmly fixed to the MCC’s. Vertical Sections -
Each motor control centre shall consist of one or more rigid free standing vertical section(s) bolted together to form a unit assembly.
-
Sections shall be suitable for mounting starters in front of the section.
-
Vertical sections shall be front connected and be capable of being wired from the front without removing any units. Adequate vertical wiring space accessible from the front shall be provided in a separate vertical isolated wireway, with covers. Openings, covered by removable gasketted plates, shall be provided in ends of vertical sections to allow for future addition of vertical sections at either end. Removable plates shall also be used to cover the top and any unused space on the front and back of the control centres. Where called for in specific requirements, space shall be provided for installation of future units. This space shall be complete with bus, unit supports and isolating barriers.
Unit Compartments Each control unit shall be designed for mounting within a vertical section in such a manner that each unit will be completely enclosed and isolated from all other units. Adequate space shall be provided for entry of wiring from the vertical wiring trough. Control units shall be “plug in” type construction, equipped with selfaligning stabs of a type that will increase contact pressure on short circuits. Control units shall be capable of independently and satisfactorily clearing a fault on the load side of the starter with 42,000 symmetrical amperes available at the line side terminals. Page 4 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 6 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
Each unit compartment shall be provided with an individual front door. Starters and feeder unit doors shall be interlocked mechanically with the unit disconnect device to prevent unintentional opening of the door with power on and unintentional application of power while the door is open. Means shall be provided for releasing the interlock for intentional application of power, if desired, while the door is open. Padlocking arrangements shall permit locking of the disconnect device in the OFF position with a maximum of 3 padlocks with the door closed or open. Starter disconnect devices shall be operable from outside the enclosure and shall show position of disconnect device whether compartment door is opened or closed. Similar nameplates showing unit location I.D. shall be installed at left top corner of front door of each unit. Special tools and equipment shall be provided for operation and maintenance purposes. STARTERS, DISCONNECT AND ACESSORIES Motor starters shall be in accordance with this specification. The maximum starting currents for motors shall be: -
Less then 10 hp
-
10 hp to 50 hp
-
50 hp and above
–5 times full load current -2 times full load current -1.5 times full load current
The stationary equipment shall be as follows: Motors up to 10 hp will be connected Across-The-Line with over current protection Motors 10 hp and above shall be controlled with motor starters of a soft start design. Provide moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) for feeders with current limiting protection as indicated on single line diagrams. The rating of the MCCB’s shall be in accordance with the load indicated on the single line diagrams with a minimum of 65kA interrupting capacity. ACROSS-THE-LINE STARTING Controllers shall be of circuit breaker combination type with full voltage magnetic starters for across-the-line starting. Full protection of each phase shall be provided in starters by means of electronic overloads. Undervoltage protection shall be provided by the starter coil to disengage on 65% of rated voltage unless otherwise noted.
Page 5 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 6 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
ELECTRONIC OVERLOAD RELAY Vendor shall provide an electronic overload relay for connecting the starter. The overload relay shall have a current adjustment range of 5:1 or greater. The overload relay shall have +/- 2.5% setting accuracy. The overload relay can be converted from manual to automatic reset. The overload relay trips in two seconds or less under phase loss conditions when applied to fully loaded motor. The overload relay provides a visible trip indicator. The overload relay provides led status indication. The trip indication LED flashed in a pattern that indicates the trip cause. The overload relay provides 1 N.C. auxiliary contact. The overload relay provides a test trip function that when operated trips both the N.C. contacts and the N.O. triac outputs. The overload relay has trip free construction The overload relay is ambient temperature compensated The overload relay has user selectable 10, 15, 20 or 30 tripping classes The overload relay has user selectable jam/stall protection. The overload relay has user selectable ground fault protection. The overload relay is compatible with a hand-held or panel-mounted interface device that provides a two-line Bakelite LCD and start, stop and reset control functions. The overload relay can communicate on an open communications bus. The overload relay provides the following information on a communication network. -
Average Current
-
Percent Phase Imbalance
-
Percent Thermal Capacity Used
-
Trip Cause
-
Full load Current Setting
-
Output Triac Status Page 6 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 6 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
The overload relay provides two triac outputs that enable the overload to control two starter coils. The overload relay provides the following control functions on a communication network. -
Start Stop Reset
Variable Frequency Drives Vendor shall provide variable frequency drives (VFD) for applications that require varying the speed of squirrel cage motors as indicated on single line diagrams. The VFD shall be as detailed in Section 5. Power Correction Capacitors Refer Section 7 for details. 3
INSPECTIONS AND FACTORY TESTS MCC’s shall be inspected at each stage of manufacture in accordance with the Vendor’s quality assurance program and shall be completely assembled in the works. All deficiencies shall be corrected before shipment. Seller shall advise the Consultant 5 (five) working days before completion and before testing commences to Consultant, if required, to make arrangements to witness the inspection(s) and tests. MCC’s shall be tested in the manufacturer’s works in accordance with the referenced standards. Tests to include: -
Routine functional tests. Insulation (Megger) and hi-pot of wiring.
Page 7 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 7 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS, REGULATORS AND HARMONIC FILTERS
SECTION 7 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS, REGULATORS AND HARMONIC FILTERS
Page 1 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 7 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS, REGULATORS AND HARMONIC FILTERS
SECTION 7 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS, REGULATORS AND HARMANIC FILTERS
INDEX
1.0
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS & REGULATORS
2.0
HARMONIC FILTERS, SURGE ARRESTORS
3.0
HARMONIC ANALYSIS
Page 2 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B - SECTION 7 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS, REGULATORS AND HARMONIC FILTERS
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS & REGULATORS These shall be provided as per DEWA requirements. The power factor correction capacitor shall comply with the relevant BS and IEC Standard and shall be double insulated dry type with self – healing metalized polypropylene film dielectric with low losses to IP 545 and shall incorporate a discharge resistance and harmonic filters. An overpressure disconnector switch shall be fitted on each capacitor as an additional safety measure. Capacitors shall have aluminium housing and be detuned to below 3rd harmonics. Capacitance variation due to ambient temperature shall be taken into consideration and the capacitors shall be derated to give the required capacitance at 50 deg. C. Capacitors shall be protected by circuit-breakers and wired through cables with capacity of 1.6 times the capacitor rating. Where multi steps capacitor bank is used the power factor shall be maintained at a set value indicated by the reactive power regulator which shall control the opening and closing of the capacitor switching contactors. Number of capacitors to be connected through the regulator, in the event of Power failure or when the Power is restored, shall be in accordance with the System reactive power. The high inrush current due to capacitor switching shall be taken into consideration by using fast acting contactor designed for capacitor switching and which shall be able to handle 100 times the rated current. In addition to that, the cable connecting the contactor to the busbar shall be installed in a way that self inductance is produced e.g. by coiling the cable into necessary number of loops along the cable run. Capacitor shall be designed and constructed to with stand any harmonic currents if existing and additional filters shall be provided to withstand harmonic currents. The capacitor panel supply shall be by means of isolating switch with door interlocking device. Each bank of capacitors shall be controlled by its own contactor , sized for the capacitive load and a set of three HRC fuses . Choke coils shall be provided which protect the capacitor banks from switch on inrush currents. The electronic regulator, indicator lamps for mains on, banks on, auxiliary circuits on, Auto-Off- manual switches for each bank shall be mounted on the front of the panel. Capacitors shall meet the requirements of EN 60831-1/2 and its reliability shall be recognized by the mark UL810. Capacitors shall generally be of cylindrical aluminium case equipped with M12 bottom fixing stud. Capacitors shall be fixed with overpressure disconnector and discharge resistor. Temperature category: -25/+50 deg. celcius. PCB dielectrics shall not be used. An Electronic regulator shall be provided to control the switching on and off of the banks of capacitors. It shall work with a current signal 0.5 and 5Amps and return to zero for absence in voltage. It should be equipped with display facilities for Volts, amp on the CT secondary and power factor. Capacitors shall shut off incase of generator operation.
Page 3 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
2.0
PART B - SECTION 7 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS, REGULATORS AND HARMONIC FILTERS
HARMONIC FILTERS AND SURGE ARRESTORS Surge Arrestors shall be provided for each Main LV MDB panels. The harmonic levels as specified for harmonics generating equipment like VFD’s, UPS etc. shall be complied with. Total harmonic level in the system shall not exceed 5% of the system voltage. Harmonic in the system shall be analysed by Contractor after energizing and switching on the loads. If active filters are required, Contractor shall submit three proposals within prices which shall be considered as an additional cost under PC sum. Harmonic study shall be included as part of the contract.
3.0
HARMONIC ANALYSIS An harmonic analysis shall be performed based on an approximation method for evaluating total harmonic distortion (THD) voltage at the point of common coupling (PCC), defined to be on the secondary side of the utility supply transformer. The analysis shall take into account other devices connect on the same mains network. In installation where harmonic current may affect sensitive equipment, the AC Drive manufactured shall provide an automatic adaptable harmonics compensator to cope with permanent modification of harmonic contents.
Page 4 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 8 CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER, FITTINGS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT
SECTION 8 CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER, FITTINGS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Page 1 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 8 CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER, FITTINGS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT
SECTION 8 CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER, FITTINGS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
INDEX
1.0
CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES
2.0
FLEXIBLE CONDUITS
3.0
CONDUIT INSTALLATION
4.0
GENERAL WIRING TRUNKING
5.0
CABLE TRAYS/CABLE LADDERS
6.0
DADO TRUNKING / SKIRTING TRUNKING
7.0
SERVICE OUTLET BOXES
8.0
WIRE BASKETS
Page 2 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B -SECTION 8 CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER, FITTINGS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT
CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES All conduits embedded in concrete, plaster and screed unless otherwise specified shall be extra heavy wall black PVC and shall conform to BS 4607. All exposed conduits shall be heavy gauge, welded, screwed and galvanized steel in accordance with BS 4508. PVC Conduits shall be black of the extra heavy wall with 1.8mm minimum thickness for 20mm dia conduit. Steel conduits shall be of the heavy gauge galvanized steel, welded and screwed type zinc coated, hot dipped galvanized both inside and outside. All set, fixing and wood screws used throughout the installation shall be brass. Accessories mounting box shall be provided with brass earth terminal and shall be supplied with adjustable steel grids. Conduit boxes for steel conduit systems shall be malleable iron with screwed spout outlets, blind cover fixing holes, galvanized and water proof with external lugs where required. Each steel conduit thread shall be given a coat of aluminium paint upon completion of conduit installation. All circular PVC boxes where used to support lighting fittings shall be provided with steel insert clips. The sizes of the conduits for all wiring shall be in accordance to IEE regulations and DEWA Standards and shall be such that a cable can be withdrawn and another drawn in without disturbing the remainder. However, the size of the conduit shall not be less than 20mm where used for lighting and power circuits and 25mm for telephone / data wiring.
2.0
FLEXIBLE GI CONDUITS
3.0
PVC sheathed and watertight Flexible metal conduits, shall be provided between the conduit system and electrical motors or other apparatus subject to vibration. They shall be complete with brass double female adaptors and will be soldered to either end of all flexible conduits and connected to solid conduit entries using smooth bore male brass bushes. Earth continuity through flexible conduits shall be provided by a separate earth continuity conductor, sized in accordance with BS Standards. The brass adaptor specified above shall be drilled so that the earth wire can be brought out at each end. The earth wire shall be soldered at each end to the brass adaptors or alternatively connected to a substantial earth terminal. CONDUIT INSTALLATION All joints in PVC conduits, other than screwed joints, shall be cemented with a waterproof adhesive. This adhesive shall be as recommended by the conduit manufacturer. Screwed connections between steel conduits and accessories shall be screwed up tight, where coupled by a socket the conduit ends shall butt together; running joints shall be provided with back nuts which shall be screwed up tight. PVC conduits shall be saddled at a minimum of 1 metre intervals. All saddles, tubes and boxes must be in perfect alignment to avoid any appearance of warping when the Page 3 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 8 CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER, FITTINGS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT
installation is complete. Saddles should not be so tight as to prevent expansion of the conduit. Steel conduits run on the surface shall be secured with galvanized saddles spaced not more than 2 metres apart. All saddles for steel conduits shall be of the distance type. Spacer bar type saddles will NOT be permitted. All ceiling boxes concealed in ceiling slabs or voids above false ceilings shall finish flush with the underside of the ceiling and all necessary extension or break joint rings shall be provided and fitted. Steel conduits which finish at boxes or other equipment without smooth bore spouts shall be fitted with smooth bore bushes, the inside diameter of which shall be equal to the bore of the conduit. The junction shall be made by means of a male to female threaded socket bearing on the outside of the box and into which shall be screwed from the inside of the box a hexagon smooth bore male bush. Plain or inspection elbows, or tees, will not be permitted and the number and position of boxes and sizes of conduits shall be arranged to permit the cable being drawn-in easily after all conduits have been erected. Stock bends below 38 mm diameter will not be allowed; all such bends shall be formed out of the conduit at Site to suit the local conditions. Sets and bends shall be made without indentation and the bore shall remain full and free throughout. Conduits shall not be run closer than 0.15m to any steam or hot water pipes and shall be run underneath such pipes rather than over them. The conduits shall not be run closer than 0.05m to any telephone, bell or other signalling circuit. No wiring or drawn-in wires, cables or wires of any description are to be drawn into the conduits until the section of the conduit system involved is complete. A separate conduit and wiring system is to be provided for each installation i.e. lighting general purpose sockets, power, telephone, etc. Drawn-in boxes must be provided to give access to all conduit for the drawing-in or out of any cable after the installation is completed and should not be spaced more than 9m on straight runs. On runs with not more than two right angle bends the spacing between draw-in boxes shall not exceed 7m. Not more than two right angle bends shall be installed between boxes. Conduits shall not be laid to falls, but the Contractor shall exercise care to ensure that no pockets are formed within the conduit system in which water can collect. Drainage holes shall not be provided. In floors which are in direct contact with the earth or under which unheated foundation voids are situated, conduits shall not be laid to form traps in which moisture can collect. Where it is impossible to arrange for drainage to a lower level such floors shall be avoided altogether and the conduit shall be run in the floor above with drops to socket outlets and other low level points. Embedded conduits shall be fixed in position by crumpets or such other means of fixing as shall be necessary to ensure that they remain rigidly in structure or finishes. Page 4 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 8 CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER, FITTINGS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT
Where steel conduits enter sheet steel wiring trunking, iron clad gear or junction or similar boxes, the junction shall be made by means of a flanged coupling with lead washer bearing on the outside of the box and into which shall be screwed from the inside of the box a hexagon smooth bore brass male bush of heavy pattern. Where PVC conduits connects to any sheet steel wiring trunking, steel clad switchgear and the like, these shall be connected to the PVC conduit system with female thread to plain push-in adaptors with a male bush or with male thread to plain push-in adaptors with locking ring as may be required. Steel conduits which do not finish at boxes with smooth radiused inside spouts shall be fitted with smooth bore bushes, the inside diameter of which shall be equal to the bore of the conduit. Where conduits cross a building expansion joint due allowance shall be made in the design of the run with an approved expansion joint. All screwed joints for conduits and fittings erected in the open air, damp situations and plant room shall be made water-tight by the application of a suitable metallic paint and conduit boxes being fitted with rubber gasket. Separate earth continuity conductors will be installed within the normal circuit wiring. The conduit system shall be such that 'cross-overs' are reduced to a minimum and runs shall be located to avoid holes in the floor slabs required for other services. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that no grout or other foreign materials enters the conduit system through joints, or through surface openings. Screw holes in boxes must be kept entirely free and clean. After screeding, compressed air is to be blown through the conduit system to ensure that it is clean and a steel draw wire of adequate size to be pulled through to ascertain that no obstruction is adhering to the inside of the conduits. Draw wires shall be left in all conduit runs for other services not included in the contract. 4.0
GENERAL WIRING TRUNKING Cable trunking, ducting and fittings should comply with BS 4678 Standards. All cable trunking accessories such as bends, tees, cable retainer, cable separators, reducer and support shall be supplied from the manufacturers standard product range. Site fabricated accessories shall not be acceptable. Cable trunking shall be of sheet steel fabrication, galvanized to with heavy protection both inside and outside. The access plate of the trunking shall be removable in easily-handled sections over the entire length of straight runs. Overlapping collar sections or other similar approved linking arrangement shall be provided at the junction of the various sections of the trunking. All fixings shall be so arranged that there are no projecting screw threads or similar points within the trunking which may cause damage to the cables. The section of the trunking shall not be so changed at deviations from the straight as to decrease the cross- sectional area. Positive continuity links shall be supplied and fixed at all trunking section interconnection points. Page 5 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 8 CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER, FITTINGS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT
Cable trunking shall not be installed to expose to other mechanical stress except the loads associated in carrying cables. Spacing of supports for cable trunking shall be as recommended by the standards, supports shall be positioned within 300 mm of each bend or fittings. A calculation for the space factor shall be forwarded for approval and the trunking shall be sized accordingly. 5.0
CABLE TRAYS/CABLE LADDERS Cable tray and cable ladder shall be produced to BS 729 and shall be hot dip galvanized. Prefabricated mild steel cable trays shall be constructed of steel and finished hot dipped galvanized. All trays supporting power cables shall be folded edge heavy duty tray with return flange and those supporting fire alarm and telephone cables shall be medium duty. Sheet steel thickness for cable trays shall be as indicated hereunder for the different sizes and types: -
Heavy Duty
:
100mm to 300mm 1.5mm 450mm to 600mm 2.0mm Cable trays, bends and junctions shall be provided as necessary and shall be similar type and finish. The trays shall be of adequate widths to support the necessary cables. They shall be adequately supported throughout the length or run at intervals not exceeding 1200 mm. All cables shall be fixed to the cable tray utilising cable ties. Ventilated covers shall be provided for all cable trays exposed to direct sunlight. Cable ladder shall be produced of 2mm hot dipped galvanized mild steel. Only 40% of the cable tray and the cable ladder space shall be occupied. Cable tray size calculations shall be forwarded for approval and the tray size shall be increased, if required, to meet the above without any extra cost. 6.0
SKIRTING / DADO TRUNKING The trunking shall be provided as per the requirements of BS 4678 partly and BS 4662. The uPVC trunking shall be either installed skirting level or DADO level as shown on drawings. The system shall comply with all relevant requirements of 16th edition of wiring regulations and structured cabling Standards. All corridors, extension corridors, covers, and cable dividers shall be extruded. Corners, corner covers, stop ends cover seals and accessory boxes must be formed by injection moulding. It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide a proper arrangement and installation of the system to engineers requirements and all necessary interconnecting junction boxes, risers, joints etc to be provided. The trunking cover shall be uPVC to incorporate all outlets. Sizes of Trunking shall be as shown on drawings with two / three compartments, for power and voice / data. Sockets shall be from the same manufacturer of trunking flush with the cover. Voice data outlets shall be supplied under structured cabling contract. Back box and face plate shall be provided by the skirting system vendor. Page 6 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 8 CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER, FITTINGS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT
Backboxes shall be provided as required for conduit drops. Refer detailed specifications in Medical Services Installation (Part A – Section 10) for service panels / bed head units. 7.0
SERVICE OUTLET BOX Service outlet boxes shall be two-compartment type of the size 300x 300 x75-90mm and shall be constructed from high-pressure Zinc Alloy die casting base frame pillars. This shall be fixed on to heavy gauge galvanized steel base plate for support by support frame. Other materials adequate in strength and performance shall be used and these shall be protected against corrosion. The boxes shall be constructed with provisions for ducting or conduit access on all four sides. Unwanted entries shall be blanked off with detachable side blanks. Covers for service outlet boxes shall be made of high pressure Zinc Alloy die casting with 12mm recess to receive ceramic tiles or carpet tiles. They shall be lifted by suction cups as and when required giving access at all times to the power, telephone and ELV outlets. Counter sunk screws shall secure the covers of service boxes. All exposed portions of the boxes shall be epoxy coated in grey color. All boxes shall have extra wide gaskets in order to minimize water seepage. Gaskets shall be made of material that is durable in order to withstand loads. All boxes shall be adjustable in height thickness.
to take account of difference in floor
Cables emerging from service boxes shall be protected against damage by means of nylon cable exit grommets or equivalent and approved material and shall be reversible to close position when not in use. Circuit protective conductors shall be provided between the covers and the boxes. The boxes shall be adequate in strength to take in a ceramic tile, and withstand loads normally seen in airports and pubic locations. 8.0
STEEL WIRE BASKETS Baskets shall be constructed from 5mm steel wires. The spacing between longitudinal wires shall be 50mm and between transverse wires 100mm. The steel wires shall be welded at all joints. Transverse wires shall be “T“ welded to top edge longitudinal wires in such a way so as to minimise fraying of the cables when being laid. The steel wire baskets shall be Electro-Zinc galvanized and corrosion resistant. Wire baskets shall be minimum 50mm high and, 150mm / 200mm / 300mm / 400mm / wide as may be specified elsewhere or as shown in layout drawings. INSTALLATION Steel wire baskets shall be installed as shown in layout drawings as per manufacturer’s instructions. Installation shall be carried out only after obtaining approval of representative samples of baskets & accessories from the Engineer. Purpose made accessories such as couplers, brackets & supports, fittings, dividers & covers as may be specified else where, only shall be used for the installation of wire baskets. All accessories shall be so constructed so as to permit easy and quick assembly and installation. Equipotential earth bonding shall be carried out as per manufacturer‘s recommendations. Page 7 of 7
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 9 SYSTEM OF WIRING
SECTION 9 SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page 1 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 9 SYSTEM OF WIRING
SECTION 9 SYSTEM OF WIRING
INDEX
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
TEMPORARY WIRING
3.0
CABLE
4.0
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.0
FLEXIBLE FIRE RESISTANT CABLES
Page 2 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B - SECTION 9 SYSTEM OF WIRING
GENERAL Unless otherwise specified all wires and cables enclosed in conduits or trunking or the like, shall be single core LSF insulated 450/750/V grade and the installation shall be carried out on the looping-in system with continuous mains throughout each circuit. All connections to fittings and the like shall be of a solid nature and small connectors (other than porcelain enclosed heavy brass sleeves) will not be allowed. Porcelain connectors enclosing heavy brass sleeves shall be provided for heat resisting trails for enclosed fittings and for the drops for pendant type fittings. All connections to flexible cords or cables shall be such that any strain on the cord or cable is not transmitted to the connections. All wires/cables connections to switches, socket, circuit breaker etc. shall be carried out using suitable swivel lugs or cable ends. Joints in the PVC wiring cables will not be allowed in any part of the system The number of cables run in conduits shall be in accordance with the IEC – wiring regulations and DEWA Regulations. With the exception of 3 phase power points or sub main supply circuits to 3 phase boards the circuits grouped in any one conduit shall be connected to one phase of the system only. This does not apply to wiring run in metal trunking. All switch wires for lighting circuits shall be on the 'live' side. When drawing the wires and cables into the conduits or trunking, the Contractor must see that proper appliances are used so that the wires and cables suffer no damage whatever in the process. All kinks must be rigidly avoided and care must be taken to ensure that the insulation, taping and brading of the cables receive no damage or abrasion. During the progress of work or at completion, the engineer may require certain wires and cables to be drawn out in order to test that the conditions mentioned have been complied with. They may require that certain fittings and/or accessories be dismantled for examination of workmanship and quality. The final subcircuit connection and wiring shall be carried out in accordance with DEWA regulations and unless otherwise indicated, the following details shall apply throughout the works :a)
Lighting Circuits up to 1000 Watts: 10 amp MCB protection Wired with 3 x 4.0mm2 LSF / SC cables.
b)
Lighting Circuits 1200 to 1800 watts: 15 amp MCB protection Wired with 3 x 4.0mm2 LSF / SC cables. c)
13 amp socket outlets:
20 amp MCB protection on radial main basis wired with 3x4 mm2 LSF / SC cable shall be provided for upto four socket outlets serving one room only of less than 50 Sq. meters floor area. Page 3 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 9 SYSTEM OF WIRING
32 amp MCB protection on ring main basis wired with 4 x 4mm2 and 2 x 4mm2 LSF / SC cables shall be provided for maximum 8 nos. 13 A sockets. d)
Fixed Medical Equipment. 20 amp MCB protection Wired with 2 x 4mm2 and 1 x 4mm2 LSF / SC cables.
e)
Fan coil units each / VAV Units. 20 amp MCB protection wired with 2 x 4mm2 and 1 x 4mm2 LSF / SC cables.
The above details for connections shall apply throughout the Works, except where the related Regulations would be contravened in respect of permissible voltage drop. In such cases the contractor shall utilize a larger conductor size as appropriate. 2.0
TEMPORARY WIRING No part of the new installations shall be connected temporarily to the Supply Authority's mains without the approval of the Engineer and the Authority. All temporary lighting and electric wiring which the Contractor may require, must be provided by the Contractor who will be responsible for all charges for electricity consumed as stated in the Contract conditions. Temporary wiring and connections executed by the contractor to the instructions of the Engineer shall be arranged in accordance with the IEE regulations. Where the ambient air temperature is in excess of 50 deg.C. heat resisting silicon rubber cables shall be used for temporary connection. Where such cables may be subject to mechanical damage they shall be protected by conduit.
3.0
CABLE All cables supplied and installed shall be selected shall be LSF / Fire proof types with stranded copper conductors and shall comply with the appropriate British Standard referred to below as applicable. (i)
LSF insulated wiring cables non-armoured 450/750V grade
BS. 6491.
LSF insulated steel wire armoured LSF sheathed cables 600/1000V grade
BS. 6346.
XLPE insulated steel wire armoured LSF sheathed multi-core cables 600/ 1000 V grade.
BS. 5467.
(iv)
LS ZH cables
BS. 6724.
(v)
Fire resistant cables
BS. 4066 Part-1 IEC–332 & BS 6387 Category CWZ
(ii)
(iii)
Page 4 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
(vi)
PART B - SECTION 9 SYSTEM OF WIRING
Flexible cables a)
b)
single core LSF insulated non sheathed cables. cables for wiring of luminaires
BS. 6004. BS. 4533.
(vii)
MICC Cables
BS 5750
(viii)
Control cables XLPE and LSF insulated 600 / 1000V BS 5467 BS 6346
Cable specification and manufacture must be consistent throughout each wired system. All cable utilised must be continuously run from source to termination, without any through jointing included. Cable must be adequately stored and protected from damage pending installation and also during installation until permanent protection is effected. Cable reels must be supported on purpose formed support frames and under no circumstance shall cable be drawn from reels laid on the ground. This shall be strictly enforced as the Engineer's condemnation of any cable that is considered to have been abused will involve total replacement at cost to the Contractor. The cross sectional area of every cable shall be suitable for carrying the maximum sustained load current under normal conditions and shall be selected in accordance with related Regulations. The cross sectional area of the neutral conductor for 3-phase circuits shall be equal to the cross sectional area of the phase conductors. The cables shall be selected such that the drop in voltage from the origin of the installation to any point in the installation does not exceed 4% of the nominal voltage when the conductors are carrying the full load current, but disregarding starting conditions. Voltage drop calculation shall be submitted for approval and the cross sectional area of the cable shall be increased accordingly if required to meet the above mentioned requirement without any extra cost. The cables connected in parallel shall be of the same type, cross sectional area, length and disposition and be arranged so as to carry substantially equal load currents. Where cables are to be connected to bus bars, breakers etc. The insulation and/or sheath shall be removed for a distance of 150mm from the connection and replaced by suitable heat-resisting insulation. The wire armour of single core cables in the same circuit shall be bounded together at both ends. 4.0
CABLE INSTALLATION The installation of cables shall conform to IEC regulations and DEWA requirements. All cables shall be protected against any risk of mechanical damage to which they may be liable in normal conditions, of service. Where cables are installed under floors or in ceiling voids, they shall be run so that they are not liable to be damaged by contact with the floor or the ceiling or their fixings. Where the cables passes through holes in metal work, care shall be taken to prevent abrasion of the cables on any sharp edges.
Page 5 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 9 SYSTEM OF WIRING
All cables rising through floors and trench covers shall be protected, for example, by a length of lead or steel or PVC pipe which should project at least 75mm above the finished surface level. The open end of the pipe shall be sealed with a suitable compound. Lead and PVC pipes shall be used where they will be free from mechanical damage or in situations where steel pipe would be subject to corrosion. The cables installed throughout the system shall be enclosed in conduit, duct, ducting or trunking as specified. All cables buried in the ground shall incorporate an armour and all cables installed in positions which may be exposed to direct sunlight shall be supported by heavy duty cable tray and shall be suitably covered by a standard ventilated stand and non perforated cover to protect from ultra-violet light. Cable ties shall be utilised to fix cables into cable trays, cable separator and cable retainer shall be utilized to fix cables into cable trunking. All conduits, ducting and trunking shall be properly supported and of a type suitable for any type of mechanical damage to which they may be liable in normal conditions of service or adequately protected against such damage. The internal radius of every bend of a non-flexible cable shall be as recommended by manufacturer and the related standards. Cables under roads, and where deemed necessary under pipe tracks etc., shall be protected by concrete encased PVC ducts. Bitumen bonded fibre ducts shall not be used under any circumstances. Conduit buried in trenches or in the ground is not permitted. Where existing cable sleeves are to be utilised, the contractor shall ensure that the lower most ducts are employed, thereby leaving any remaining ducts accessible for future use. Cable ducts shall be sealed at both ends using materials that are not soluble in hydrocarbons, and that are resistant to any likely corrosive and insect attack in the area concerned. Fire Barriers Where conduit, ducting and/or trunking pass through fire-resistant structural elements such as walls and floors designated as fire barriers, the openings made shall be sealed according to the appropriate degree of fire resistance. In addition to this external fire barrier, an internal fire-resistant barrier shall also be provided to prevent the spread of fires. Cables Installed Underground Direct buried cables shall be bedded in 75mm of clean sand or riddled soil, covered with similar material, then protected by concrete slabbing or interlocking tiles. The trench shall be backfilled over a plastic identification tape laid for as detailed under cable and cable trench marking. Prefabricated concrete troughs or preformed trenches in which cables are laid shall be filled with clean sand to provide the top layer of cables with a minimum of 75mm cover, or be completely filled with sand if this should be required by circumstances. Prefabricated cable troughs, partly or wholly filled with sand shall be closed using prefabricated concrete covers. Such covers shall be provided, by the contractor, to meet Page 6 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 9 SYSTEM OF WIRING
any particular load bearing requirements but shall not be less than adequate for use as a footpath. Preformed trenches shall be sand filled and closed by floating over with concrete of adequate strength and thickness. The use of chequer plating and other materials for closing cable troughs, trenches etc., shall be confined to those conditions where such special treatment is fully justified technically and economically and shall be agreed by the Engineer. Power cables operating at voltages of 415 volts and above shall not be routed below 'jacked-up' typed unfixed flooring systems in any internal area unless unavoidable for the purpose of supplying equipment installed on the flooring system. In such cases the power cables must be totally enclosed within a steel trunking, conduit, etc., over their entire route length below the flooring system irrespective of the type of cable used. Cable trench and prefabricated trough depths should not normally have less than 500mm. Direct buried cables should not normally have less than 500mm of cover from cable to finished grade level. The above shall be varied according to the requirements of actual site conditions and cable routes to provide adequate safeguard against, for example, erosion, soft ground conditions and mechanical damage etc. The maximum thickness of any one group of cables shall not exceed 75mm unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer. Cable Sheath of External Buried Cables All cables directly buried in external areas should have MDPE (medium density polyethylene) outer sheath other characteristics of external cables shall be similar to XLPE insulated cables. Cable in Duct All external cables shall be laid in 150mm dia UPVC underground ducts of 3.2mm wall thickness. Cable and Cable Trench Marking All cables shall be fitted with indestructible identification bands at each end and then over their entire length at 30 metre intervals, at all points where they enter and leave ducts, and at changes in direction, etc. Concrete or slabs covering cable trenches shall be coloured for identification purposes. Similarly where cables run under floors, markers shall be employed to clearly define the extent of the cable way over the entire route. The route of underground electric cables shall be marked by permanent markers posts. They shall be reinforced concrete units fitted with lead inserts bearing cable sizes and references. The marker post shall extent above ground level or shall be flush with the final ground level according to the site and Engineer's requirements. Two or more markers shall be visible from any point on the route and markers shall be placed at any divergence from the straight. The location of all underground power cables shall be clearly identifiable throughout their route length by means of a polyethylene board laid in the ground at 300mm above each Page 7 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 9 SYSTEM OF WIRING
cable. The board shall be coloured red and continuously marked, with black indelible lettering of not less than 12mm high, to read the following message in both Arabic and English: "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC CABLE 300 mm BELOW" A sample of the polyethylene board shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to any cable laying works being carried out. The cable trench as shown on the drawings between service block and main building cable termination room shall be decided taking into consideration of laying all cables within the trench in 3 or 4 layers on cable ladders with sufficient access space. The crossing of other services through the trench must also be considered while deciding the exact width and depth. Jointing and Terminations All cable conductor shall be fitted with a correctly sized cable socket or thimble and a means of identification. The cable sockets may be of the sweated or crimped compression types. If for the former the solder should have a melting point of not less than 185 deg.C and if for the latter they must be the appropriate tools as specified by the manufacturers of the joint connectors. The cable terminations shall be made following the positive identification of the conductors in accordance with the specified phase rotation sequence. Joints in cable are not allowed and shall not be carried out without the written approval of the Engineer. Low tension cable joints shall incorporate compression type ferrules with polyethylene tape insulation housed in a plastic joint box and sealed with cold pouring resin fitting. 5.0
FLEXIBLE FIRE RESISTANT CABLES Fire resistant cable shall have stranded (if installed in conduits within slab) plain annealed copper conductors to BS 6360 with extruded silicone rubber insulation to BS 6899 and Aluminium/PVC laminate and PVC composite sheath with tinned copper circuit protective conductor. The cable shall be manufactured and tested to BS 7629.1993. The conductors shall be solid if installed externally on any surface, and clipped directly. The cables shall be rated at 300/500V and shall be suitable for operation at sheath temperature of 70 deg. C. The cable shall comply with the flame retardant requirements of BS 4066: Part 1, and the requirements of BS 6387, category CWZ and IEC-332. The cable shall be LSZH type. The Fire resistant cables used for the wiring of Fire Alarm System and Central Emergency Lighting System shall be laid in conduits embedded in slab or wall.
Page 8 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 10 LIGHTING
SECTION 10 LIGHTING
Page 1 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 10 LIGHTING
SECTION 10 LIGHTING INDEX
1.0
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.0
EXTERNAL LIGHTING
3.0
SCHEDULE OF LIGHT FITTINGS
Page 2 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B -SECTION 10 LIGHTING
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Complete data sheets from the manufacturer shall be included in the submittal of each luminaire. Lighting equipment and lighting fixtures shall be as called for on plans by designated symbols and type. Said equipment shall embody the highest standards of electrical and mechanical design with maximum efficiency obtainable and all shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Furnish and install a full complement of all types of incandescent and discharge lamps required in the fixtures installed throughout the complex. All hangers, cables, supports, channels, frames and brackets of all kinds for safely erecting this equipment in place, shall be furnished from the standard manufacturer's product range and shall be erected in place under this Section. Contractor shall protect all opening edge in gypsum false ceiling by a protection means to engineer’s approval. Each lighting fixture shall have a manufacturer's label affixed to it and shall comply with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. Fixtures shall be wired with approved fixture wire. Each fixture shall be wired to a single point with adequate slack for proper connections. All fixtures shall be protected from damage during the installation and any broken fixtures, globes, sockets, stems, and the like, shall be replaced with new parts, without additional cost of the Employer. The right to select other fixtures of the same quality, without additional cost to the Employer is reserved by the Engineer regarding the shape of the lighting luminaire. All lighting fixture shop drawings, cuts, etc., shall be complied and submitted in bound brochures. All loose pages, sheets, clippings, etc., will not be accepted. Catalogue cuts shall contain sufficient data to evaluate all properties of the fixtures submitted. If requested a sample of proposal fixture shall be submitted. The supply to lighting fittings mounted on or recessed into a false ceiling shall be effected by means of a plug in type ceiling rose plug in type mounted on a conduit box within the false ceiling space with a three core heat resisting flexible cable connection. When fixtures are surface mounted to the ceiling, ceiling rose shall be provided adjacent to the fixture. All prismatic controllers for fluorescent fittings shall be of the injection moulded acrylic type to obviate discoloration. Plastic diffusers will not be accepted. When light fittings are installed in areas with plaster board false ceiling, supply wires shall be directly terminated in the fitting with proper connectors. The wires shall be contained in flexible conduits inside the ceiling void. The flexible conduit shall terminate at both ends with proper adaptors.
Page 3 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
2.0
PART B -SECTION 10 LIGHTING
EXTERNAL LIGHTING Furnish and install external lighting fittings of the types specified and in the positions indicated on the drawings. Check all requirements regarding conduit runs and positions and the casting in of conduit. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the installation and wiring of the external lighting installation as shown on the drawing and in accordance with the schedule of light fittings.
3.0
SCHEDULE OF LIGHT FITTINGS Light Illumination The lighting illumination shall be in compliance with Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineering (CIBSE). The lux level shall be as follows: S. No.
Location
Lux
1.
Plant rooms
300
2.
Reception Desk
500
3.
Ward Corridors
200
4.
Nurses station
500
5.
Operating Theatres:
Remarks
i.
Operating table (operation light)
50000 to 100000
ii.
All other areas
500
6.
Conference room
500
7.
Staircase
200
8.
Store, dirty room
200
9.
Pantry
400
10
Consulting room
400
11
Observation
400
12
Laboratory
500
13
Treatment suit
400
14
X Ray
400
15
Examination room
400
General
1000
Local (Local examination luminaire).
400
General.
1000
Local (Local examination luminaire).
16
Maternity
Page 4 of 5
Special Lighting for the operating table.
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 10 LIGHTING
S. No.
Location
Lux
17
Pharmacy
500
18
Library
500
19
Lift lobby
250
20
Loading bay
150
21
Kitchen/pantry
500
22
Car Parking
50
Remarks
The contractor shall provide detailed lux level calculations for all areas to confirm the performance of the selected light fittings for consultant/client approval. Schedule For light fitting details refer to electrical lighting drawings.
Page 5 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 11 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 11 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
Page 1 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 11 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 11 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM -INDEX
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
CONTROL SYSTEM CONCEPT
3.0
CENTRAL CONTROL SOFTWARE
4.0
LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES
5.0
TIMERS
6.0
LIGHT SENSOR
7.0
LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS
8.0
INPUT CONTROL DEVICES
9.0
MOTION SENSOR, FLUSH MOUNTED
Page 2 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B -SECTION 11 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
General The Programmable Lighting Management System shall be supplied, installed and commissioned in accordance with the European Installation Bus – EiB technology. The system shall also work as a stand-alone unit including timing functions incase of PC failure and shall be programmable locally. Proposed system shall not have any bottle neck or single source of failure. Proposal shall be based on a redundant system. A two-wire bus cable shall link+ all sensors (push buttons, brightness sensors, motion sensors, timers, etc.) and actuators (on/off controllers, dimming controllers, etc.) to each other. The bus cable shall be a twisted pair, screened & shielded with solid conductors and shall be capable of handling information exchange and supplying power to the bus devices. The bus cable shall be laid in the building in the form of a linear, star or tree structure similar to the power mains. The system shall be completely de-centralized and programmable. The programming shall be implemented via a high end PC located in BMS room and having access level passwords. Any device in the system shall be accessed for programming from the PC location without having to manipulate the device locally. Each device in the system shall be addressable via a software programmable physical address. Any device in the system shall communicate with any other device via software programmable group addresses (telegrams). Each individual device will respond to only those group addresses for which they are programmed to do so. There shall be an EEPROM storing the physical address, group addresses & other software parameters for every device, thus making it intelligent. No centralized processors or centralized memory storage devices shall be permitted. It shall be possible to program any of the devices on-line at the working site without affecting any of the system devices or the system operation as well as off-line prior to despatch of the material to site. The entire system shall consist of bus lines each consisting of up to 64 devices. Two consecutive lines shall be connected to each other via line couplers that act as network filters and also provide communication between devices in different lines. In the event of failure of a device in one line, only the control functions controlled by that device shall be affected and the device failure report shall be printed out with the date and time of failure. The power supply module feeding power to the network shall consist of a built in backup power to compensate short voltage interruptions of upto 200 ms. This back-up power shall enable the system to put all actuators in a fail-safe position (either on or off or as it is) in the event of power failure. The diagnostic modules shall scan the system for any faults in the bus wiring, failure of any of the devices and generate reports displaying the physical address of noncommunicating devices. The Lighting Management System shall also be integrated with the Building Management System in automation layer so as to monitor and control the required Page 3 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 11 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
circuits from the BMS workstation and hence to achieve a reliable system. EIB / C-bus interface to be provided for total integration. It is electrical Contractors scope and responsibility to re-arrange circuiting to achieve the functionality of C-bus / EIB system as explained without any claims. The following codes and standards to the extent specified herein, form a part of this specification. When an edition date is not indicated for a Code or Standard the latest edition enforce at the time of proposal submitted shall apply. IEC 60947-4 IEC 60947-5-1, IEC337-1, IEC 60536
Indication lamps, Push buttons, switches
BSEN 60529 BSEN61439
Low voltage switchgear and control gear
BSEN 61008 BSEN 60898
Earth leakage circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers
BS7671
2.0
Contactors
17TH Edition, IEE wiring regulations
CONTROL SYSTEM CONCEPT The programmable lighting management and control system shall consist of following levels of control. The BMS shall be utilised for time based control and manual override by the BMS operator. The EIB system shall be software interfaced with BMS and transfer all data to BMS. The software shall consist of graphics based overview of the entire building, floors and going up to the individual rooms. It shall have the necessary timer modules to control the circuits in the form of various groups. It shall be possible to pre-program the time channels in advance with special holiday programs, weekly programs, etc. In the event the PC is not operational or is switched off, the standalone mode shall control the lighting circuits as per programmed times. This shall be ensured via controllers programmed with the same timer schedules as that of the central PC software. A second level of standalone operation shall also be possible via local timer modules capable of being programmed with switching times locally without the need to connect a PC. 4-channels timer capable of being programmed with at-least 128 time schedules / timer shall be provided for each network group of 64 devices to ensure this standalone operation. This shall ensure that the system remains operational at all times in the auto mode. All other circuits which are controlled based on occupancy sensors, daylight, local switches, etc. shall at all times be working in the standalone ‘Auto’ mode with monitoring and override control possible from the central PC. Lighting Control Concept Page 4 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 11 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
All lighting shall be controlled such that unnecessary lights shall be switched ‘Off’ based on occupancy and duty hours. Also lights redundant due to sufficient daylight shall be switched ‘Off’ based on light sensor and time schedules. The movement sensors shall have a built-in lux sensor with an adjustable set point so as not to switch ‘On’ circuits even after detecting movement due to sufficient natural light. There shall also be an adjustable ‘Off’ delay on the movement sensor from 1 sec to 16 min so as to ensure that circuits are not switched ‘Off’ immediately. Further, the movement sensor shall incorporate a “manual-auto-off” switch for maintenance and local override purpose. Lighting control in different areas shall be as follows: The scenes or requirements listed below must be programmable as per site requirements. a)
Car Parking Lights connected to emergency circuit shall be ON all the time Switch OFF all lights Switch off 50% of drive way lights. Parking bay On / Off and 50% on/off. Ramp lights shall be kept “ON” during night time and shall be selectable. Stair lights operated through push buttons and switch OFF after defined time.
b)
Corridor, Lift Lobbies Switch 50%, 50% lights based on occupancy. Switch OFF all lights. Switch On lights connected to Central Emergency Lighting System. Movement sensor based operations.
c)
External Switch On / Off external lights in ground and roof floors, façade (elevation) lights, signboards, etc. based on time lighting level (programmable) and season. Switch On / Off external façade lights based on the requirements of façade lighting Consultant. Complete façade lighting shall be controlled through Lighting Control System as per lighting Consultant’s requirements. Number of daylight / twilight sensors must be suitable to achieve the operation and exact location to be decided at site. Contractor to include additional sensors if required while commissioning proper coverage without any variation.
Page 5 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 11 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A four channel timer device shall control circuits on a particular network group (line) so as to have local standalone operation. It shall be possible to send signals from a timer channel in one network to circuits in another network if programmed to do so. This is to ensure that all timer channels are available for control of all circuits in the system. Each timer shall be capable of being programmed locally with at-least 128 timer programs for any of the four channels combined together, without the need to connect a PC. Each of the four channels shall have a manual push-button to over-ride the channel to ‘On’ or ‘Off’ irrespective of the time programs. In addition, each channel shall have a ‘Off-Auto-Manual’ switch for local over-ride purpose. The timer shall have a builtin battery back-up to ensure that the timer is always operating even in the event of power failure. This timer device shall be in addition to the PC software time schedules to ensure uninterrupted stand-alone operation of the system at all times. e)
Staircase lighting All staircase lighting shall be controlled by timers and push button switches. Light shall be turned ‘ON’ using the push button switches and shall be turned ‘OFF’ automatically after a pre determined time period which can be set using the timer. Separate timer control shall be provided for each group of lights such as facia lighting, land scape lighting, water feature lighting, Walkway/road lighting, and boundary wall lighting as applicable. Actual time schedule for the various circuits shall be decided during commissioning time and shall be to the approval of consultant.
f)
Offices, Doctors’ Offices, Stores, Staff Lounges, Nurses Rooms, Examination / Treatment Rooms, Multi-Purpose Rooms, sterilization, pharmacy, Outpatient Clinics, Etc: lighting control shall be by timer channels and override switch in the above mentioned areas. lights in individual offices shall be turned on/off using the intelligent switch during working hours, however the system switches shall be overridden by timer schedules during non-working hours and on holidays in which lights shall be turned off. Different application areas shall have separated timer channels
g)
Conference and Meeting Rooms Lighting control shall be by timer channels and intelligent lighting control switch. Lights in individual rooms shall be turned on/off using the intelligent switch during working hours; however the system switches shall be overridden by timer schedules during non-working hours and on holidays. Intelligent dimmer switches for dimming the lighting during presentation
h)
Wards Corridors All lights connected to emergency power supply shall be on all the time. lights connected to the power supply shall be on/off through programmable timer channel, actual time schedule as per client requirements. Dedicated timer Page 6 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 11 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
channel will be provided for wards corridor lighting. Intelligent switches shall be provided at nurse station for the purpose of overriding i)
Entrance at Ground Floor Lighting shall be switched on/off based on available daylight. A light value switch capable of switching up to three lighting groups where each individual channel has a separate switching set point shall be used. The brightness range of the set points shall be adjustable from 2 to 2000 lux or 20 to 20000 lux as agreed with the client at the time of commissioning. A light sensor shall be connected to the switch to detect daylight.
3.0
CENTRAL CONTROLLER SOFTWARE The software shall be same as used for BMS. EIB system shall be fully Software integrated with BMS. The software shall administer 255 access levels for 255 different user accounts to ensure responsibility and accountability in the operation of the system. The software shall provide customized graphics screens giving a full graphics display of the entire building along with floorplans, partition layouts, circuit layouts in the individual rooms, etc. The software shall provide real time monitoring of the entire system and shall display active status of each lighting circuit along with the run time hours and generate maintenance schedules when the circuits have reached their threshold set-points for run hours. It shall be possible for the user to access any individual room for monitoring and controlling the lighting circuits. The various screens shall be freely linked to each other (“hyper-link principle”) or be reached by a navigator (“Quick-finder”). Each circuit shall be graphically customized to contain operational characteristics available in the system or by a link to an external database. This information shall be displayed by passing the mouse cursor over the respective circuits (tip-strip mode). The software shall have the interface to import and administrate graphics files having standard formats such as Bitmap (BMP), Windows Metafile (WMF) and Enhanced Metafile (EMF). Further, it shall be possible to add a huge variety of active elements to these files for visualisation and easy understanding. The software shall enable repeat interrogatory sweeps to be programmed through the nigh or any other times to extinguish lighting which may have been left on locally. The timer library in the software shall be programmable. It shall have the necessary timer modules to control any of the circuits individually or in the form of groups which can be selected and changed as and when desired. It shall be possible to pre-program the time channels in advance with special holiday programs, weekly programs, etc. upto the year 2040.
Page 7 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
4.0
PART B -SECTION 11 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES The lighting control modules shall be DIN rail mounted consisting of four individually programmable integral relays (contactors). Each of these contactors shall be rated 10/20A A/AC3 together with a switch-on current carrying capacity suitable for switching loads with high switch-on peaks. Additional contactors shall not be used to control any of the lighting circuits. The output states of each of the four relays shall be displayed on the front. Each of these relays shall be latch-on type with manual operation (override) possible even without power to the system. In the event of power failure or bus wiring failure or control module failure, each of the four relays shall attain a pre-programmed fail-safe position (‘On’, Off’ or ‘As it is’). The control modules shall be capable of been programmed with different applications to suit site requirements for e.g. staircase lighting function which switches ‘Off’ the relays after a preprogrammed time from the time it has switched ‘On’. The application for which a relay has been programmed shall apply irrespective of the signal from which it is switched. Each of the relays shall be capable of being programmed with its own ‘On’ and ‘Off’ delays which is applicable irrespective of the signal from which the relays are switched. The control modules shall receive its operating power supply from the same bus cable without any other power supply. It should not operate on any 220/240 V AC supply to avoid possible fire hazards. Each of the control module shall have its own individual address and shall be capable of being programmed from the central PC for the purpose of changing parameters without the need to access the module locally.
5.0
TIMERS These devices should provide a 100-channel time function used to control, monitor and schedule any devices on the system. A touch sensitive graphic user interface with customised text should be provided. The device shall feature a scheduler on-board to schedule events on the network. The device shall be used to monitor and control the devices located on the network.
6.0
LIGHT SENSOR Light level sensors: These devices are designed to measure lighting levels and automatically generate messages onto the bus to regulate light levels within defined limits. For indoor applications measuring range should be between 20 – 3000 lux. For out door applications, measuring range should be between 1 lux to full sunlight. Lux level range and set points should be programmable, and the sensor should be able to control any number of circuits connected to the bus. Protection
-
Operating temperature range -
IP 54 acc. DIN 40 050 40°C to + 70°C Page 8 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
7.0
PART B -SECTION 11 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
Connection Lighting sensor
-
Weight
-
Type
-
3 screw terminals connection cross section 0.5 – 1.5 mm2. 0.04 kg Light value switch, 3-channel LW/S 3.1 light sensor LF/A 1.1
LIGHTING CONTROL PLANELS LCPs shall be located near to DBs. There shall be a dedicated Lighting Control Panel (LCP) for every DB feeding lighting circuits in general areas. The LCP shall house the system devices and the related control equipment depending on the no. of circuits being controlled. This is to ensure the power wiring between the DB’s and the control modules inside the LCPs is kept to a minimum. The LCPs shall be surface mounted IP65 polycarbonate enclosures together with built-in DIN-rails for easy installation of the control equipment.
8.0
The wiring of the lighting circuits must be re-arranged without any variations to meet all the specified lighting control requirements. INPUT CONTROL DEVICES Input modules shall comprise the following types; Key input units (programmable switches): These shall be available in a range of styles, colours and finishes. The key inputs shall feature led status indicators and shall be programmable as dimmers, timers, toggle and master switches. Switches shall feature an infrared receive option and shall be programmable as scene controllers.
9.0
No. of gangs shall be indicated on drawings. The briefing rooms, conference rooms shall be provided with 4 scene / 2 scene dimmer modules. Touch pad shall be provided as shown on drawings. MOTION SENSOR, FLUSH MOUNTED Motion device sensor with sensor angle 180 degrees is used to send switch-on commands to actuators via the i-bus EIB. The switch-off behaviour is defined in the actuator. Twin light sensor and after-running time are adjustable; manual operation for ON/AUTOMATIC/OFF must be possible. Installation recessed ceiling mounted, wall mounted or external weather proof mounting to engineers approval. Supplier must provide all mounting accessories required. Sensing
-
Power supply Ambient temperature Operation Storage Coverage Transport Operating and display elements 1 slide switch 1 adjustment potentiometer 1 adjustment potentiometer Protection type
-
Passive infrared motion detector 180° horizontal via EIB – Bus / C Bus
-
5°C to + 45°C 25°C to + 55°C Minimum 18m range 25°C to + 70°C
-
OFF/AUTOMATIC/ON for Twilight sensor : 51000 lux. for after–running time:10s to 17min. IP 20 according to DIN 40 050 Attached to the flush- mounted bus couple
Page 9 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 12 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
SECTION 12 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
Page 1 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 12 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
SECTION 12 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
INDEX
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
ELECTRONIC SYSTEM SURGE PROTECTION
Page 2 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B -SECTION 12 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
GENERAL Faraday cage type lightning protection systems shall be installed to cover the complete building as per BS EN 62305. A 25x3mm copper tape air termination network shall be fixed at 1m intervals using DC tape clips to the building roof. Air termination network shall be following class I LPS with 5x5m mesh. Items of roof-mounted plant shall be bonded to the air termination network via same copper tapes. All exposed metalwork on the roof or the structure shall also be securely bonded to the air termination network. A bimetal clamp shall be used to bind different metal. 25 x 3mm copper tape down conductors shall be installed within the structural column and clamped using ‘U’ clamps to structural rebar. Down conductors shall not be positioned more than 10m apart around the perimeter. The connection between tape and cable shall be by welded rod to tape clamp or prewelded if required. The complete installation shall be inspected and certified by the authorized representative of the manufacturer for compliance with standards. The connection between the down conductor and the earth electrode shall be made below ground level in a small purpose-made pit with test link and removable concrete cover to facilitate future testing and maintenance. Each electrode shall consist of 1200x16mm or equal stainless steel rods complete with stud, spike, driving cap and a conductor strip clamp. Sufficient number of rods of suitable length shall be installed to provide an overall resistance to earth not exceeding 10 ohms. All metal work on or around the building must be bonded to the lightning protection network to avoid side flashing. Where it is necessary to form tape to tape joints, they shall be tinned soldered and riveted. Soldering alone will not be accepted. Clamped or bolted joints will only be accepted at test points and for connection of down conductors to earth rods. All materials used throughout the installation except earth rods shall be either copper or copper based components which are corrosion resistant and compatible with the application. The Contractor shall submit fully detailed shop drawing for the air termination network, down conductors, earth termination network and bonding and shall be responsible to provide all the necessary accessories to integrate the system with the architectural finish of the building.
2.0
ELECTRONIC SYSTEM SURGE PROTECTION Electronic system surge protection shall be used for the, Incoming Main Power Supply : A suitable protection should be installed in the main LV MDBs. The ESP shall be connected in parallel with the supply. ESP should be installed within the LV MDB by the panel assembler. Page 3 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 12 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
HRC Fuses shall be provided in the connecting leads as required by the Specialist. ESP to have neutral earth warning light, to detect if there is excessive voltage present between neutral and earth. Protection shall be tested in accordance with the requirement of: BS EN 62305 : Protection against lightning. BS2914 :1972 ‘Specification for surge diverters for alternating current power circuits’. IEEE C62.41 – 1991 ‘Recommended practice on surge voltage in low voltage AC Power circuits.’ The protector must not interfere with or restrict the system normal operation. It should not: -
Corrupt the normal mains power supply.
-
Break or shutdown the power supply during operation.
-
Have an excessive earth leakage current.
The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of no less than 10 KA (8 / 20 microsecond waveform) between any two conductors (phase to neutral, phase to earth, neutral to earth). The protector shall limit the transient voltage to below equipment susceptibility levels. Unless otherwise stated, the peak transient let-through voltage shall not exceed 600 volts. For protectors with a nominal working voltage of 230 or 240 volts, when tested in accordance with BS 6651 : 1999 Category B – High (6kV 1.2 / 50mircorsecond open circuit voltage, 3kA 8 / 20 microsecond short circuit current). This peak transient let through voltage shall not exceed for all combinations of conductors: -
Phase to neutral
-
Phase to earth.
-
Neutral to earth.
Mains protectors (installed in shunt / parallel) should have continuous indication of its protection status and the presence of power. Status indication should clearly show per phase. -
Full protection present.
-
Reduced protection – replacement required.
-
No protection – failure of protector.
The status indication should warn of protection failure between all combinations of conductors, including neutral to earth. (Otherwise a potentially dangerous short circuit between neutral and earth could go undetected for some time). This should include early warning of excessive neutral to earth voltage. Page 4 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 12 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must comply with the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer. Protection for Data Communication and Telephone lines Transient overvoltage protectors shall be installed on all data communication / signal / telephone lines entering or leaving the building, in order to protect equipment connected to the line, against transient overvoltages. (Where data lines travel between buildings linking equipment in each building, transient overvoltage protectors should be installed at both ends of the line in order to protect both pieces of equipment). Protectors shall conform to BS EN 62305 Protection against lightning The protector must not impair the systems normal operation. It should not: -
Restrict the system bandwidth or signal frequency.
-
Introduce excessive inline resistance.
-
Cause signal reflections or impendence mismatches (on high frequency systems).
The protector will have a low transient ‘let – through’ voltage for tests conducted in accordance with BS EN 62305 This ‘let – through’ performance will be provided for all combinations of conductors : -
Signal line to signal line.
-
Signal line to screen / earth.
The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of 10kA. The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must comply with the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturers. The protector manufacturer should allow for the facility to mount and earth large numbers of protectors through an accessory combined mounting and earthing kit.
Page 5 of 5
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 13 EARTHING
SECTION 13 EARTHING
Page 1 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 13 EARTHING
SECTION 13 EARTHING
INDEX
1.0
MAIN EARTHING SYSTEM
2.0
CLEAN EARTHING SYSTEM
Page 2 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 13 EARTHING
1.0
MAIN EARTHING SYSTEM
1.1
The contractor shall adequately allow in his tender for the provision and the installation of a complete earthing system required to meet the following requirements and shall ensure that the entire electrical installation is effectively bonded to earth as per BS 7430 and DEWA Standards.
1.2
The contractor shall ensure that the whole of the electrical installation is both mechanically and electrically continuous throughout and is bonded to a suitable main earth in compliance with the IEE regulations and BS Code of Practice.
1.3
A test connection link shall be provided for testing purposes.
1.4
The nominal cross-sectional area of all earth continuity conductors shall be in accordance with the IEE regulations with the minimum size being 2.5mm2.
1.5
All switchboards shall be provided with copper earth bar continuously run along the switchboard frames. Main earth electrodes via earthing cables shall be connected to in accordance with DEWA, requirements.
1.6
All switchgear, metal conduit and trunking systems, metal frames, enclosures, lighting fittings and cables sheaths shall be bonded together and connected to the earth tapes of the appropriate switchboard. Similarly all earth pins and metallic plates of socket outlets, switches, accessories and enclosures shall be bonded to earth with earth continuity conductors. Each individual earth path shall be electrically continuous throughout its length from the farthest point of the associated part of the system back to the main earth.
1.7
All earthing cables shall be installed in accordance with the relevant requirements called for in the cables section of this specification.
1.8
All bonding leads in the form of cable having a standard conductor shall be terminated in "sweated" sockets and shall be rigidly bolted to earthing terminals.
1.9
All earthing cables shall be insulated with a PVC sheath. Where connection of the earth lead to the main earth is made with a stranded cable, the earth lead shall be double insulated with PVC.
1.10
Mechanical protection shall be provided for all external runs of earth cable as specified.
1.11
Earth cables shall have same construction details as mains cables.
1.12
The main earth pits shall be complete with all accessories. The value for earth resistance shall be 1 ohm or less.
1.13
Equipotential bonding conductors (6mm2 minimum) shall be provided for metal pipes, water pipes, metal doors and other extraneous conductive parts and brought to the main earthing terminal in ground floor electrical room for final connection to the main earth pits.
1.14
The metal doors & door frames in electrical rooms and substations shall be equipotentially bonded to the main earthing network.
1.15
The earth rods shall be stainless steel, corrosion resistant type. Page 3 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 13 EARTHING
2.0
CLEAN EARTHING SYSTEM
2.1
Clean earthing system shall be provided for Operation Theatres, ICUs and Resuscitation areas and shall consist 50 x 6mm riser bar connected to a separate earth pit and connection point in each specified area. The UPS and low current panels shall also be connected to the clean earthing system.
Page 4 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
Page 1 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM INDEX
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
UPS
3.0
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
Page 2 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
GENERAL Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Un-interruptible power Supply systems of capacities as shown on the related drawings. The system shall operate in conjunction with the building electrical system and the generator to provide high quality power for critical equipment loads such as computer servers and related equipment, power outlets feeding main controllers of BMS, security system, Fire alarm system etc. for a period of 30 minutes until the generator power is available. This will hereafter be referred to as the “UPS”, and shall provide continuous, regulated AC power to the loads under normal and abnormal conditions, including loss of the utility AC power. The UPS shall be completely solid-state except for maintenance bypass switches which may be mechanical. All UPS shall have interface cards to have the following and shall be complete with system software: 1)
Required input and output dry contacts for reporting alarm and status.
2)
RS232 port for serial communication for advanced remote monitoring and control through computer network.
3)
Communication port with appropriate protocol for connection to BMS system.
All UPS systems shall be based on latest IGBT (insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor) technology with PWM (Pulse Width Modulation). Rectifier configuration shall be such that THDI (Total Harmonic Distortion Current) at upstream shall be minimum. The following shall be furnished along with the equipment: Factory testing. Documentation. The UPS shall be recommendations.
installed
in
accordance
with
the
manufacturer's
The equipment proposed must be in conformity with the following directives and standards – Directives - 9/336/EEC (and amendments 91/263 and 92/31), 3/23/EEC, 3/68/EEC. Standards
- Safety N 50091-1-1 N 50091-1-2 - EMC N 50091-2
EN 60127, EN 60269-1 EN 60445, EN 60529, EN 60950, EN 61008-1, EN 61009-1
EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2, EN 55011, EN 55022 Page 3 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
EC 62040-2
EN 61000-2-2, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3, EN 61000-4-1, EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-11, CISPR 16-1.
- Battery
EC 896-2, Eurobat.
- Marking
CE, TUV/GS
- Design Production Logistics & Service
ISO 9001
- Applicable local laws and regulations The UPS system shall be capable of withstanding any combination of the following environment conditions in which it must operate, without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating characteristics: a) Ambient temperature:
0 to 40 degrees C
b) Relative Humidity: Up to 95% (non-condensing) c) Interference:
The UPS equipment shall be provided with EMI/RFI suppression following EN-50091-2.
Audible Noise: Noise generated by the UPS system under any condition of normal operation shall not exceed an allowable sound pressure level of 55-70 dB(A) measured at 1 metre depending on the rating of the UPS. 2.0
UPS Objectives: To supply, install, test and commission the Uninterruptible Power Supply system as per the technical specifications laid down in this document. Ratings : As per schematic Quantity : As per schematic Power factor : 0.9 (output) or higher KVA UPS if PF is 0.8. The Uninterruptible Power Supply system specified herein should comply to each of the following mandatory points keeping in view the very latest in UPS technology to provide the best possible Power protection and most importantly offer Maximum Energy Saving: -
UPS should be based on latest technology for Modulation for higher accuracy and the best overall efficiency of 92% minimum.
-
True On Line Double Conversion and Voltage Frequency Independent (VFI).
-
PS. Input Total Harmonic Distortion of Current THDI <5% using Active Filter (DCU).
-
Superior Battery Management for measurement of True Backup Time. Page 4 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
-
Back Feed Protection Devices on the Static Bypass and Inverter to prevent Power feed back to the upstream devices.
-
Digital Signal Processing for optimised inverter switching and fast and precise control.
-
IEM MODE (Intelligent Energy Management) for Parallel Redundant Systems. Refer Section 10.0.
-
Redundant Parallel Architecture and Paralleling Capability of up to 8 UPS systems.
-
The UPS manufacturer must be an ISO 9001 / EN 29001 certified organisation with minimum 30 years experience in the design, manufacture, servicing and testing of UPS Systems.
-
TUV/CE Certification.
TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION Active Filter (DCU) for 5th, 7th, 11th and 13th harmonics to reduce reflected current harmonics THDI to a value of less than 7% and to improve input power factor to 0.98 at full load. The filter must never present a capacitive load to the mains. The DCU should operate on all UPS systems from 40kVA till 500kVA. This arrangement consists of a 6-pulse rectifier with the Active Filter (DCU) connected at the input of the UPS in parallel. The Active Filter (DCU) will be mounted in an additional matching cabinet. Each UPS system shall consist of the following major components: •
One rectifier/charger
•
One static inverter
•
One no-break static transfer switch
•
One maintenance by-pass switch
•
One battery bank
•
One main control and alarm panel complete with mimic diagram and LCD display
OPERATION The UPS system shall operate in any of the following modes: -
On-line Mode - During normal operation, the UPS system shall be used to provide precise regulated and transient-free power to the computer equipment loads. The mains supply provides power to the rectifier / charger. Page 5 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
The rectifier / charger shall provide regulated DC power to support the inverter and simultaneously maintain the battery in a fully charged condition.
-
The inverter shall convert the DC power into regulated AC power for the load. Battery Mode - Upon failure of the mains supply, input power for the inverter shall automatically be supplied from the directly connected battery. When the mains is restored or the standby generator set supply is ready, input power for the inverter and for recharging the battery shall automatically be supplied from the rectifier/charger. If the input does not return, the UPS shall automatically shut itself down in an orderly manner when the discharge limit of the battery is reached.
-
By-pass Mode - Upon the failure of static inverter, the no-break static transfer switch shall be activated automatically to isolate the faulty inverter and at the same time maintain a continuous supply to the system load. The automatic transfer mode shall also operate in the event of system overloading or if irregular or undesirable output for the load is detected. In this case, the system shall automatically return to the original mode of operation if the disturbance is cleared.
-
Manual By-pass Mode - If the UPS system needs to be isolated for testing or removed from service for maintenance, the maintenance by-pass shall transfer the loads from inverter to the mains without interruption and vice versa.
-
Power Conditioner Mode - If the battery only must be taken out of service for maintenance, it will be disconnected from the rectifier/charger and inverter by means of a circuit breaker. The UPS shall continue to function and meet all the performance criteria specified herein except for the protection time requirement.
-
Intelligent Energy Management (IEM) mode - In order to increase efficiency a single UPS shall operate in IEM mode supplying the load through the static bypass line within specified tolerances (customisable). This transfer shall be manual, automatic (load dependent) and programmable. In case of bypass out of set tolerance, the UPS shall transfer the load interruption free to inverter line.
RECTIFIER -
General - The rectifier/charger must consist of a 12-pulse fully controller Thyristor bridge, which converts the 3-phase utility voltage into a controlled and regulated DC voltage, in order to supply power to the inverter, and to simultaneously charge the battery.
Page 6 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
-
Capacity - The rectifier/charger shall have sufficient capacity to support a fully loaded inverter and at the same time maintain the battery in a fully charged condition. If the battery is fully discharged, the rectifier/charger shall recharge the battery to 95% of its fully charged condition within twelve (12) hours and at the same time supplying full load current to the system.
-
Walk-in - The rectifier/charger must contain a timed walk-in circuit to limit the inrush current. The allowable initial inrush surge and the walk-in time should be adjustable and not exceed 30 sec.
-
Sequential power walk-in - a sequential walk-in of every single rectifier/charger shall be automatically executed in case of the start up of a parallel system in order to limit the inrush current to the value of one single system.
-
Current and Voltage Limit - The rectifier/charger output current and voltage shall be limited to the battery supplier's recommendation. Rectifier charger Technical Characteristics
Input Power - Voltage
= 400/230V
- Voltage tolerance
=(+15%)
- Frequency
= 50 Hz + 10%
- Power Factor
> 0.8 lagging
BATTERY -
The battery banks must be stationary and of the following type: Absorbed Glass Mat type, Sealed Lead Acid totally maintenance free with a minimum design life of12 years at 25°C.
-
The batteries shall fully comply with BS 6290 part – 4, IEC 896-2 and DIN 43534. The proposed batteries shall have the following features: • Low self discharge • Multiposition usage • Spill proof and leak proof • Completely maintenance free, sealed construction. • Increased durability and deep cycle ability for heavy demand application. • Value regulated Max internal pressure 2.5 psi. • FAA and IATA approved as non-hazardous.
Page 7 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
-
End Cell Voltage should be limited to a maximum of 1.65VDC and not any value below this to safeguard the life of the battery. The Charge voltage should be set for 2.27-2.30VPC at 25°C cycling.
-
The 99% of the gas generated during normal operation shall be internally recombined. The pole caps shall be Neoprene to prevent accidents. All battery interconnectors must be solid or laminated tinned copper bars.
-
The ampere-hour rating of the battery shall be sufficient to support the inverter for the protection time of 15 minutes with the inverter operating at full rated load at power factor 1.0 for 10-40kVA and 0.9 for 60 kVA - 500kVA.
-
Specified Battery Manufacturers: Exide-Sprinter
Germany
Celltec
USA
Dynasty
USA
Yuasa
Japan
BATTERY CABINETS: -
Bolted Construction, with double door, central supporting column, removable side and top cover and open bottom. The cabinet must have a piped frame with four removable battery shelves and screw on panels at top, side and rear. Battery fused isolator must be located inside the cabinet with auxiliary contact to indicate isolator close or open. The battery shall be mounted in a cabinet matching the UPS Colour and supplied by the same UPS Manufacturer.
-
The UPS system must be provided with a manual and automatic battery test (pre-selectable by day of the week, time of day, date of the month). The test operates by slowly initiating a linear decrease of the rectifier output voltage. If a battery fault is detected, the rectifier voltage will return to nominal avoiding transferring the critical load on by-pass. Automatic battery test by simply shutting down the rectifier is not permitted.
INVERTER -
General - Power transistors of the IGBT type must accomplish the conversion of DC to AC. The technology should strictly be based on Latest IGBT MODULATION Techniques.
-
Failure of any components or power stage shall not interrupt the AC output instead it shall disconnect itself from the configuration while transferring the load to the static transfer switch and then activate an alarm.
-
IGBT MODULATION TECHNOLOGY The Modulation of the IGBT’s shall be of latest technology and shall incorporate Maximum modulation at 415 V AC Output. The Output Transformer shall be designed for 415VAC. The Number of battery cells in the Page 8 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
DC link shall therefore remain constant for all ranges of Output Voltages as mentioned below – No. of Batteries Output Voltage No. of Battery cells 400V 192 32* 415V 192 32* *Note: Exact no of batteries shall be as per manufactrurers standard. -
Superior Battery Management (SBM) - This feature should be built into the UPS as standard and should facilitate the following – • Measurement of true backup time. • Temperature Voltage compensation. • Programmable battery tests. • Increase in battery life.
-
The waveform shall be fed through a filter circuit and protected by fast fuses. The inverter shall be able to handle short-circuit conditions without any damage.
-
Frequency Control - The output frequency of the inverter shall be controlled by an oscillator, which can be operated as a free running unit or in synchronised operation with a separate AC source or the future redundant inverter. If the external synchronising source deviates from the pre-set frequency by + 1% or 4% (selectable), the oscillator shall automatically revert to free running, and the microprocessor controlled accuracy shall be + 0.01%.
-
Capacitor Discharge - Output filter capacitors shall be provided with a quick discharging circuit, which shall automatically discharge the capacitors to safe value within a short time after the shutting down of the inverter.
-
Inverter Technical details:
a. Output Power
b. Total Harmonics
- Voltage
= 400/230V, 3 phase, 4 wire
- Frequency
= 50 Hz + 0,1%
- Adjustment
= + 4% w/mains synch.
- Linear Load - Non-linear Load
= < 2% = < 3% (to EN-50091)
c. Phase Displacement -100% balanced load = 120° +/-1% -100% UNBALANCED LOAD = 120° +/-2% d. Unbalanced Voltage
- For balanced load
= +/- 1%
- For unbalanced load e. Voltage Transients - 50% load step - 100% load step Page 9 of 19
= +/- 2% = +/- 3%
= +/- 3%
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
- STATIC 100% LOAD - By mains recovery
= 20 m sec. to + 1%
f. Recovery Time g. Inverter Overload
= +/- 1% = +/- 1%
Capability
= 125% for 10 min. = 150% for 1 min. (30 sec for 400-500kVA)
h. Crest Factor
> 3:1 (according 50091)
to
i. Fuse Clearance capability
= 20% In within 5-10ms.
EN-
STATIC BYPASS -
The electronic by-pass shall consist of a static SCR / Thyristor-switch, used to provide an uninterruptible transfer of the load to the utility in case of remarkable variation of the output voltage. The electronic by-pass shall be equipped with two contactors in series, which provide to supply the load from utility or inverter.
-
The electronic by-pass switch must have continuous 150% overload rating capacity. In addition the static transfer switch shall support 200% overload for 5 minutes and 1000% overload for 10 milliseconds (non repetitive).
-
Back feed protection - The electronic by-pass switch shall consist of a pair of microprocessor controlled Thyristors and a contactor in series avoiding a back feed energy into the mains (back feed).
-
The electronic by-pass switch shall be able to be activated manually by a switch/push button to affect the transfer. The switching time from inverter to reserve and vice-versa shall be of No-Break when synchronised.
-
Automatic retransfer delay time back to inverter from by-pass after a transfer from inverter to by-pass shall be 10 seconds.
-
The number of automatic transfer/re-transfer from by-pass to inverter when the status of the inverter logic signals an alarm conditions, shall be selectable.
MAINTENANCE BYPASS -
On each UPS the maintenance by-pass shall be based on a pair of manually operated circuit breakers which allow the electrical isolation of the UPS from the load, while still supplying the load with power directly from the utility.
REDUNDANT PARALLEL ARCHITECTURE- RPA -
Where two or upto eight systems are to operate in parallel the system will operate in Redundant Parallel Architecture or RPA. The following principles are to be met in totality in order to achieve the highest levels of reliability.
Page 10 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
-
Two or more UPS systems to be linked in Peer to Peer configuration concurrently supplying the load. Decentralized by-pass concept. Decentralized control electronics. Redundant (n+1) operation and control for critical functions such as “Synchronization” and “Bypass operation”. Redundant communication link between individual units. Redundant MICROPROCESSORS for no Common point of Failure. Intelligent Energy Management (IEM) for power saving. Refer Section 12.4.
-
In the event that the system is to operate as separate standalone units then disconnection of the RPA system should be possible without any changes in the existing architecture of the system.
INTELLIGENT ENERGY MANAGEMENT (IEM) -
The IEM software package should be an integral part of the RPA system which allows the RPA system to save energy during low load conditions. This is achieved by requesting / programming the UPS or its Inverter to transfer its load to the remaining UPS systems and go into a silent mode. This enables the entire heat dissipation of this system to be nullified. This Silent system however is On line electronically and will switch on as programmed in the event of a problem with the utility or any other system. All this done without disruption to the load.
-
The IEM feature should ensure the following functions – • Individual Inverters, which are not required to sustain the load can automatically be switched off to save energy. • Depending on Load level, inverters are switched off Cyclically, so that every UPS has the same amount of operating hours over a period of time. • During an inverter switch off due to low load the remaining selected inverters should sustain the load. • Customer to define if the rectifiers to remain ON for battery charging or to be switched off for the UPS systems whose Inverters have been selected to switch off. • Customer to define after how long or at what Battery level rectifier should switch ON. • The IEM mode to be freely programmed to suit customer defined degree of redundancy. • The reaction of the system in case of problems can also be selected (for example: How the switched Off inverter or UPS should react to a Utility failure). Page 11 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
OPERATING PANEL AND DISPLAY -
A backlit 4 x 20 alphanumeric character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) or similar display, controlled by push buttons/membrane keys shall be provided.
-
The UPS system main control panel with LCD back-lit display shall include the following measurements indications: • Rectifier: input voltage (Ph-Ph), input frequency, number of rectifier mains failure • Battery: voltage, temperature, charge/discharge current in Amperes, remaining Autonomy time • Inverter: output voltage, output frequency, inverter temperature, operating hours • By-pass: input voltage (Ph-N), input frequency, number of by-pass mains failure • Load: load level in % (each phase), load current/phase in A, Load power in KVA/kW • UPS: serial number, software version, number of overload condition, operating hours
-
The UPS system main control panel with LCD back-lit display shall include the following events indications with date and time: • Rectifier: mains rectifier OK, rectifier ON/OFF. • Battery: start battery test, end battery test, no conditions for battery test. • Inverter: inverter cannot be switched ON/OFF, inverter ON/OFF. • By-pass: mains by-pass OK, by-pass power insufficient, by-pass locked, by-pass free.
-
Load: load-OFF, multiple load transfer, load on by-pass/inverter, no more overload Condition. General: maintenance by-pass ON/OFF, inverter and mains synchronised/not Synchronised, input circuit breakers open/closed.
-
On the system alarm panel, a common audible alarm and the respective indicating LED’s shall be initiated when any of the following conditions are present: • Rectifier: mains out of tolerance; control logic failure,
Page 12 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
• Battery:low voltage; high voltage; earth fault; contactor closing or opening failure; insufficient power. • Inverter: fuse failure; contactor closing or opening failure; voltage out of • tolerance; output power insufficient; overload. • By-pass: mains out of tolerance; contactor closing or opening failure. • Load: overload; load locked on inverter; load locked on by-pass. • General: load off for overload; battery low and over-temperature conditions; inverter and mains not synchronised; UPS overload. -
The UPS, through the LCD, must be able to store up to 256 alarms or events with date and time.
-
Mimic Panel - A mimic panel shall incorporating LED indicators depicting the complete single line diagram of the UPS system shall be silk-screened to display the following: • A synoptic diagram of the UPS representing actual operational status with integrated LED’s and power flow indications. • Emergency load shutdown (LOAD OFF) push button with protective cover. • Signal SERVICE CHECK (LED) to indicate that maintenance is required. • COMMON ALARM, visual signal (LED) and acoustic signal (internal buzzer). • Signal
STOP
OPERATION
(LED),
visual
and
acoustic
warning
approximately 3 minutes (programmable) before complete automatic load disconnection (for example when the battery is at minimum voltage or inverter is over-temperature). • LED indication for the remaining back-up time and load level. • Command button keys for INVERTER ON and INVERTER OFF. • Command button key for LED functionality test. • Command button key (MUTE) to reset general alarms and buzzer COMMUNICATION -
The UPS shall be equipped with a customer interface card, which will provide:
-
6 output dry contact available on terminal blocks (no/nc) and Delta connector these contacts shall be programmable out of 24 different alarms or events directly from the keyboard mounted on the front panel of the UPS Page 13 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
-
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
Input Connections for customer provided signals must be available for ”generator on” (reduces battery charging current during mains failures) and ”emergency power off” to shutdown UPS and load in the event of an emergency). RS232 port for the following purposes: •
Serial
communication
for
advanced
remote
monitoring
communication via PC. • Serial printer connection. • Modem connection. -
Intelligent Energy Management - Energy management software shall be provided for programming of system operational parameters. The software shall allow the user to program the operating hours of each UPS in the system during low load conditions so that each UPS is operating at its optimum efficiency. i.e. if four (4) UPS are in parallel redundancy mode and the total load is less than 50% of the UPS capacity, the software will shut down two (2) units (inverter) during off-peak hours in order to save energy and thereby the overall operating cost). If during off-peak condition, one UPS fails, the software shall be able to switch ON one of the two non-operating UPS in order to achieve the redundancy requested, this in max. 30 seconds time. However, the functional requirement of the system must be maintained during this period (i.e. redundancy is maintained)
-
MODBUS RTU. In the event that Building Management System exists the communication of the UPS to the BMS should be via MODBUS.
MECHANICAL DESIGN -
Colour - The UPS cabinet colour shall be RAL standard.
-
Ventilation - Forced air-cooling shall be provided to ensure that all components are operated within specifications with air entry in the base and exit in the top. The air volume and fan speed must be microprocessor controlled in relation to the load and the inverter’s heat sink temperature.
-
Cable Entry - Input to the system and outgoing cables shall be from the top/bottom front or top/bottom rear of the cabinet.
-
Modular Construction - The UPS system shall be modular in construction for ease of maintenance and to minimise downtime.
-
Power Connections - Adequate space for termination shall be provided for incoming and outgoing cables. The cables for interconnecting the UPS and battery cubicles shall be supplied for side-by-side installation.
-
Personal Safety - High voltage, low voltage and DC section of the system shall be adequately separated to ensure safety during maintenance and testing. The equipment shall meet the requirements of protection index IP 20.
Page 14 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
3.0
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
AUTO TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS) The automatic transfer switch shall be provided with fully rated overlapping neutral transfer contacts. The neutrals of the normal and emergency power sources shall be connected together only during the transfer and retransfer operation and remain connected together until power source contacts close on the source to which transfer or retransfer is being made The overlapping neutral transfer contacts shall not overlap for a time duration greater than 100 milliseconds. A non-over-lapping neutral transfer (fourth) pole shall not be acceptable. TRANSFER SWITCH -
The transfer switch unit shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The electrical operator shall be a single solenoid mechanism, momentarily energized to minimize power consumption and heat generation. The operating transfer time shall be one-sixth (1/6) of a second or less.
-
The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by voltage variations or momentary outages so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and temperature rise at the contacts is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two possible positions-normal or emergency.
-
All main contact shall be silver composition. Switches shall have segmented, blow-on construction for high withstand current capability and be protected by separate arcing contacts.
-
Inspection of all contacts (movable and stationary), linkages and moving parts shall be possible from the front of the switch without dis-assembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. A manual operating handle shall be provided for maintenance purposes. The handle shall permit the operator to manually stop the contacts at any point throughout the entire travel to properly inspect and service the contacts when required.
BYPASS-ISOLATION SWITCH (BPS) -
A two-way bypass-isolation switch shall provide manual bypass of the load to either source and permit isolation of the automatic transfer switch from all source and load power conductors. All main contacts shall be manually driven.
-
Power interconnections shall be silver plated copper bus bar. The only field installed power connections shall be at the service and load terminals of the bypass-isolation switch. All control interwiring shall be provided with disconnect plugs.
-
Separate bypass and isolation handles shall be utilized to provide clear distinction between the two functions. The bypass handle shall provide three operating modes: By-pass to normal, Automatic and bypass to emergency. Bypass to the load carrying source shall be affected without any interruption of power to the load (make-before-break contacts). The operating speed of Page 15 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
the bypass contacts shall be the same as that of the associated automatic transfer switch and shall be independent of the speed at which the manual bypass handle is operated. In the automatic mode, bypass contacts shall be all open so they will not be subjected to fault currents. -
The isolation handle shall provide three operating modes: Closed, Test and Open. The test mode shall permit testing of the entire emergency power system, including the automatic transfer switch(es), without any interruption of power to the load. The open mode shall completely isolate the automatic transfer switch from all source and load power conductors. When in the Open mode, it shall be possible to completely withdraw the automatic transfer switch for inspection or maintenance to conform to code requirements without removal of power conductors or the use of any tools.
-
When the isolation switch is in the TEST or OPEN mode, the bypass switch shall function as a manual transfer switch allowing transfer and retransfer of the load between the two available sources without the feedback of loadregenerated voltage to the transfer switch. This transfer/retransfer operation shall comply with Paragraph 42 of UL 1008.
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL MODULE -
The control module shall direct the operation of the transfer switch. The module's sensing and logic shall be controlled by a built-in microprocessor for maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and inherent digital communications capability. The control module shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the control module to be disconnected from the transfer switch for route maintenance.
-
The control module shall be completely enclosed with a protective cover and be mounted separately from the transfer switch unit for safety and ease of maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be provided on plug-in printed circuit bards for maximum reliability. Interfacing relays shall be industrial control grade plug-in type with dust covers. All relays shall be identical to minimize the number of unique parts.
-
The control panel shall meet or exceed the voltage surge withstand capability in accordance with IEE standard 4672-1974 (ANSI C37.90a-1974) and the impulse withstand voltage test in accordance with the proposed NEMA standard ICS 1-109.
OPERATION Three phase control shall be provided for three phase power sources. Three phase controls shall include a selector switch to enable temporary operation on single phase power sources. The voltage of each phase of the normal source shall be monitored, with pickup adjustable from 85 to 100% and dropout adjustable from 75 to 98% of pickup setting, both in increments of 1%, and shall be fully field adjustable without the use of any tools, meters or power supplies. Repetitive accuracy of settings shall be ± 2% or better over an operating temperature range of -20oC to 70oC. Factory Page 16 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
set to pick up at 90% and drop out at 85%. The control module shall include four time delays that are fully field-adjustable in increments of at least 13 steps over the entire range as follows: • Time delay to override momentary normal source outages to delay all transfer switch and engine starting signals. Adjustable from 0 to 6 seconds. Factory set a 1 second, unless indicated otherwise on the plans. • Transfer to emergency time delay. Adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes. Factory set at 0 minutes unless indicated otherwise on the plans. • Retransfer to normal time delay. Time delay is automatically bypassed if emergency source fails and normal source is acceptable. Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes. factory set at 30 minutes unless otherwise indicated on the plans. Provide a toggle switch to manually bypass time delay on retransfer. • Unloaded running time delay for emergency engine generator cooldown. Adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Factory set at 5 minutes, unless indicated otherwise on the plans. -
A set of DPDT gold-flashed contacts rated 10 amps. 32VDC shall be provided for a low-voltage engine start signal when the normal source fails. The start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the generator by requiring the generator to reach proper output, and to run for the duration of the cooldown setting regardless of whether the normal source restores before the load is transferred. Also provide a commit/no commit to transfer selector switch to select whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load.
-
A momentary-type test switch shall be provided to simulate a normal source failure. Also, terminals for a remote contact which opens to signal the ATS to transfer to emergency and terminals for remote contacts which open to inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal shall be provided.
-
A visual position indicator shall be provided to indicate bypass-isolation switch position. Pilot lights shall indicate availability of power sources and automatic transfer switch position. A prominent and detailed instruction plate shall be furnished.
-
One set of auxiliary contact shall be provided rated 10 amps, 480V AC, consisting of one contact closed when the ATS is connected to normal and one contact closed when the ATS is connected to emergency. Output terminals to signal the actual availability of the normal and emergency sources as determined by the voltage sensing pickup and dropout settings for each source, shall be provided. Page 17 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
-
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
Each switch shall be furnished with an operator's manual providing installation and operating instructions.
COMPLIANCE WITH CODES AND STANDARDS -
The ATS / BPS shall conform to the current requirements of: • UL 1008:
Standard for automatic transfer switches
• NFPA 70:
National electrical code, including use in emergency and
standby systems in accordance with Articles 517,700, 701 and 702 • NFPA 99:
Essential electrical systems for health care facilities.
• NFPA 110:
Standard
for
emergency
and
standby
power
systems. • IEEE Standard 446: IEEE Recommended practice for emergency and standby power systems (Orange Book) • IEEE Standard 241:IEEE Recommended practice for electric power systems in commercial buildings (Gray Book) • NEMA Standard ICS-2-447: AC Automatic Transfer Switches • IEC: Standard for automatic transfer switches -
The ATS shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008 as follows: • Rated in amperes for total system transfer including control of motors, electric discharge lamps, eclectic heating and tungsten filament lamp loads as referred to in paragraph 38.13 of UL 1008. • Switches 400 amperes and below shall be suitable for 100 tungstenfilament lamp load. Switches rated above 400 amperes shall be suitable for 30% tungsten-filament load. • Temperature rise tests after the overload and endurance tests to confirm the ability of the transfer switches to carry their rated current within the allowable temperature limits. • No welding of contacts. Transfer switch must be electrically operable to alternate source after the withstand current tests. • Dielectric tests at 1960 volts, rms, minimum after the withstand current test.
-
In addition to the above, ATS / BPS for use with fire pumps shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 20, standard for Centrifugal fire pumps.
WITHSTAND CURRENT RATINGS. Page 18 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
-
PART B - SECTION 14 UPS SYSTEM
The ATS/BPS shall be rated to withstand the available rms symmetrical shortcircuit current at the ATS/BPS terminals with the type of overcurrent protection shown on the plans.
TESTS AND CERTIFICATION -
All production units shall be subjected to the following factory tests: • The complete ATS / BPS shall be tested to ensure proper operation of the individual components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency and time
delay settings are in compliance
with the specification
requirements. • The switch shall be subjected to a dielectric strength test per NEMA Standard ICS 1-109.21. -
Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying compliance with all of the requirements of this specification including compliance with the above codes and standards, and withstand current ratings. The certification shall identify, by serial number(s), the equipment involved. No exceptions to the specifications, other than those stipulated at the time of submittal, shall be included in the certification.
CONFIGURATION AND MANUFACTURER -
The ATS / BPS system shall be supplied completely assembled in a form enclosure BSEN 60439.
-
The ATS / BPS manufacturer shall maintain a local service centre capable of emergency services or routine preventive maintenance and shall offer preventative maintenance contracts. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each switch, by serial number, for a minimum of 20 years.
Page 19 of 19
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Section 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Page 1 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Section 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Index
1.0
SYSTEM DISCRIPTION
2.0
VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM
3.0
GRAPHIC COMMAND CENTER
4.0
INSTALLATION
5.0
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Page 2 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Furnish and install a complete analogue addressable Fire Alarm system as described herein and as shown on the plans to be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition. a)
The system consist of stand alone analogue addressable fire alarm control panel with integrated voice alarm system in the building and a main fire alarm command center with mimic panel located in the control room.
b)
Any alarm or trouble from the peripheral circuits shall sound the buzzer, glow the alarm /Trouble/LED provided for each sensor and the 80 character LCD shall display in plain language the nature of event in the local stand alone panel and at the command centre, the same shall be repeated at the repeater panel installed.
c)
The sounder circuits shall be programmed in the control panel to have primary or secondary (or) sequential bell ringing. With time delays if necessary as instructed by the consultant during commissioning.
d)
In case of an alarm, the bell shall ring as indicated above. The AHUs in the related fire zone shall be switched off and a pre-recorded alarm message shall be enunciated through the public address system.
e)
The (AHU’s) Air handling units shall be interlocked with the fire alarm control panel for tripping purpose during fire condition.
f)
The auxiliary circuits in the control panel shall be programmed to activate corresponding to the nature of event. All equipment to be installed as shown in the layout drawings.
g)
The system shall be interlocked with the integral voice alarm system to initiate a pre-recorded message announcement.
h)
The system shall be interlocked with the security access control system to release the door locks in case of fire, however exact sequence of operation/control shall be to consultant approval.
i)
The system shall also interfaced with elevator control system; sequence of elevator recall in case of alarm activation shall be programmed in accordance with consultant requirements and to their approval.
j)
The system shall be Analogue addressable concept with closed loop initiating device circuits, individual zone supervision, individual indicating appliance circuit supervision, incoming and standby power supervision. Include control panel, manual pull stations, automatic fire detectors, sounders, annunciator, remote control devices, all wiring, connections to devices, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete operating system. Audible alarm Notification: Page 3 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Activation of any system fire, supervisory, trouble or status initiating device shall cause the following actions and indications in the control panels: a.
Sound a pre announce alarm tone for a maximum of five seconds followed by a field programmable digitized custom evacuation voice message, on the floor of alarm, the floor below and the floor above. At the end of the voice message, the alarm tone shall resume. This sequence shall sound continuously until the alarm silence switch at the control panel is activated
b.
A simultaneous message shall be delivered via all alarm speakers installed on the remaining floors indicating the requirement for occupants of these floors to remain alert for further instructions.
c.
An automatic announcement or tone evacuation signal shall be capable of interruption by the operation of the system microphone to give voice evacuation instructions overriding the pre programmed sequences.
d.
Status lights next to speaker selection switches on the control panel shall indicate speaker circuit selection.
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL Where shown on the plans, and as recommended by system manufacturer, provide and install a Fire Alarm Control Panel. Construction shall be modular with solid state, microprocessor based electronics with plug-in modules. It shall display only that primary controls and displays essential to operation during a fire alarm condition. Although the keypad can be used for control of the entire system, it shall only be used for maintenance purposes. Keypads shall not be visible or required to operate the system during fire alarm conditions. A local audible device shall sound during Alarm, Trouble or supervisory conditions. This audible device shall sound differently during each condition to distinguish one condition from another without having to view the panel. This audible device shall also sound differently during each keypress to provide an audible feedback (chirp) to ensure that the key has been pressed properly. The fire alarm control panel shall allow for loading or editing special instructions and operating sequences as required. The system is to be capable of on site programming to accommodate and facilitate expansion, building parameter changes or changes as required by local codes. All software operations are to be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control panel. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory. The ability for selective input/output control functions based on ANDing, ORing, NOTing, timing and special coded operations is to also be incorporated in the resident software programming of the system.
Page 4 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
The system Initiating & Notification circuit to be provided with minimum of 20% spare for connecting any future device as necessary. CONTROL PANEL & OPERATION Under normal condition the front panel shall display a "SYSTEM NORMAL" message and the current time and date. Should an abnormal condition be detected the appropriate LED (Alarm, Supervisory, or Trouble) shall flash. The panel audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steadily for trouble and supervisory conditions. The panel shall display the following information relative to the abnormal condition of a point in the system: a)
Custom location label
b)
Type of device (i.e.; smoke, pull station, water flow).
c)
Point status (i.e.; alarm, trouble).
These three characteristics relative to an abnormal condition of a point shall be displayed simultaneously. A LED for alarm and one for trouble shall be provided for each room for zone identification as backup to the LCD Displayed. LCD only Displays shall not be acceptable. Pressing the appropriate acknowledge button shall acknowledge the alarm or trouble condition. After all the points have been acknowledged, the LED's shall glow steady and the panel audible signal will be silenced. The total number of alarms, supervisory, and trouble conditions shall be displayed along with a prompt to review each list chronologically. The end of the list shall be indicated. Alarm Silencing: Should the “Alarm Silence” button be pressed all alarm signals shall cease operation. The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to its normal state after an alarm condition has been remedied. The display shall stop the user through the reset process with simple English language messages. Messages shall provide operator assurance of the sequential steps (like, "IN PROGRESS", "RESET COMPLETED", and "SYSTEM NORMAL:) as they occur, should all alarm conditions be cleared. Should an alarm condition continue to exist, the system shall remain in an abnormal state. System control relays shall not reset. The panel audible signal and the Alarm LED shall be on. The display shall indicate the total number of alarms and troubles present in the system along with a prompting to review the points. These points will not require acknowledgement if they were previously acknowledged. FUNCTION KEYS
Page 5 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Additional function keys shall be provided to access status data for all system points. As a minimum the status data shall include Disable/Enable Status, Verification Tallies of Initiating Devices, Acknowledge Status, etc. HISTORY LOGGING In addition to any required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of three hundred (300) events in an alarm log plus a minimum of three hundred (300) events in a separate trouble log. WALK TEST WITH HISTORY LOGGING The system shall be capable of being tested by one person. While in testing mode, the alarm activation of an initiating device circuit shall be silently logged as an alarm condition in the historical data file. The panel shall automatically reset itself after logging of the alarm. The momentary disconnection of an initiating or indicating device circuit shall be silently logged as a trouble condition in the historical data file. The panel shall automatically reset itself after logging of the trouble condition. The walk test sequence shall have the capability of activating the alarm indicating appliances to signal a unique code associated to the alarm zone. The control panel shall be capable of supporting multiple numbers of testing groups whereby one group of points may be in a testing mode and the other groups may be active and operate as programmed per normal system operation. After testing is considered complete, testing data may be retrieved from the system in chronological order to ensure device/circuit activation. Should an alarm condition occur from an active point, not in walk test mode, it shall perform all standard programmed alarmed sequences. LED SUPERVISION All slave module LED's shall be supervised for burnout or disarrangement. Should a problem occur, the panel shall display the module and the LED location numbers to facilitate location of that LED. SYSTEM TROUBLE REMINDER Should a trouble condition be present within the system and the audible trouble signal silenced, the trouble signal shall resound at preprogrammed time intervals to act as a reminder that the fire alarm system is not 100% operational. Both the time interval and the trouble reminder signal shall be programmable to suit the user’s application. ACCESS LEVELS There shall be a minimum of four (4) access levels. Authorized personnel shall only make changes to passcodes. Systems not capable of password protected manual command operations shall provide key operated switches for these Page 6 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
functions. Function key switches shall be keyed differently from any other keyed switches or locks used within the system. In order to maintain security when entering a passcode, the digits entered will not be displayed. All key presses will be acknowledged by local audible momentary tones. When a correct passcode is entered, an "ACCESS GRANTED" message shall be displayed. The new access level shall be in effect until the operator leaves the keypad inactive for ten (10) minutes or manually logs out. Should an invalid code be entered, the operator shall be notified with a message and shall be allowed up to three chances to enter a valid code. After three unsuccessful tries, an "ACCESS DENIED" message shall be displayed. Access to a level will only allow the operator to perform all actions within that level and all actions of lower levels, not higher levels. The following keys/switches shall have access levels associated with them: a)
Alarm Silence
b)
System Reset
c)
Set Time/Date
d)
Manual Control
e)
On/Off/Auto Control
f)
Disable/Enable
g)
Clear Historical Alarm Log
h)
Clear Historical Trouble Log
i)
Walk Test
j)
Change alarm Verification.
Acknowledge keys shall also require privileged access to acknowledge points. If the operator presses an acknowledge key with insufficient access, an error message will be displayed. The points will scroll with each key press to view the points on the list, but the points will not get acknowledged in the database. DETECTION OPERATION Smoke sensors shall be smoke density measuring devices having no self contained alarm set point (fixed threshold). The control panel shall determine the alarm decision for each sensor. The control panel shall determine the condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to the stored values. Alternatively, sensors with builtin microship analysing smoke density is equally acceptable. The control panel shall maintain a moving average of the sensors' smoke chamber value to automatically compensate (move the threshold) for dust and dirty conditions that could affect detection operations. The system shall automatically maintain constant smoke obscuration sensitivity for each sensor Page 7 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
(via the floating threshold) by compensating for environmental factors. smoke obscuration sensitivity shall be adjustable.
The
The system shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. When a sensor's average value reaches a predetermined value, a "DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. Additionally, the LED on the sensor base shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. If a "DIRTY SENSOR" is left unattended, and its average value increases to a second predetermined value, an "EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. To prevent false alarms, these "DIRTY" conditions shall in no way decrease the amount of smoke obscuration necessary for system activation. The control panel shall continuously perform an automatic self-test routine on each sensor which will functionally check sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted to the control panel. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble condition with the sensor location at the control panel. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each sensor: a)
primary status
b)
device type
c)
present average value
d)
present sensitivity selected*
e)
peak detection values*
f)
sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
g)
Values shall be in "percent of smoke obscuration" format so that the operator requires no interpretation.
At least 1000 individually identified sensors as well as conventional initiating device and indicating appliance circuits shall be supported within a single control panel. For increased smoke detection assurance, all individually addressed smoke sensors shall be provided with alarm verification. Only a verified alarm shall initiate the alarm sequence operation. LED OPERATION The alarm LED shall flash on the control panel acknowledged.
Page 8 of 25
until the alarm has been
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received from another zone after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control panel and the panel display shall show the new alarm information. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur until acknowledge. Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received from another zone after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control panel and the panel display shall show the new alarm information. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur until acknowledge. ALARM VERIFICATION The activation of any system smoke detector shall initiate an Alarm Verification operation whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a second alarm activation. If, within one (1) minute after resetting, a second alarm is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process the alarm as described previously. If no second alarm occurs within one minute the system is to resume normal operation. The Alarm Verification is to operate only on smoke detector alarms. Other activated initiating devices shall be processed immediately. The alarm verification operation is to be selectable by device. The control panel shall have the capability to display the number of times a zone has gone into a verification mode. Alarm verification zones shall have the capability of being divided into seven different groups whereby only two verification zones from a group will confirm the first activation and cause the panel to follow programmed alarm sequence. MANUAL EVACUATION A manual evacuation switch shall be provided to operate the systems alarm indicating appliances. Other control circuits shall not be activated. However, a true alarm shall be processed as described previously. ALARM & TROUBLE CONDITIONS Alarm and trouble conditions shall be immediately displayed on the control panel front alphanumeric display. If more alarms or troubles are in the system the operator may scroll to display new alarms. The system shall have an alarm list key that will allow the operator to display all alarms, troubles, and supervisory service conditions with the time of occurrence. This shall allow for the determination of not only the most recent alarm but also may indicate the path that the fire is taking. SUPERVISION All auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that all switches must be returned to the normal automatic position to clear system trouble, particularly for the AHU and pressurization fans. Page 9 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete panel readout to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator. The System Expansion Modules shall be electrically supervised for module placement. Should a module become disconnected from the controls, the system trouble indicator must illuminate and audible trouble signal must sound. The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance or testing purposes. POWER REQUIREMENTS 230V AC power via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit shall be provided for each panel. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 230 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of twenty-four (24) hours with 30 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at the control panel. Batteries shall be of the Sealed lead acid type with a minimum life expectancy of 10 years and mounted in suitable enclosure. Additional features shall be: a)
Automatic dual – rate charging
b)
Ammeter and Voltmeter
c)
Charger “ON” indication
d)
Charger “failure” indication
e)
“High-rate” indication
f)
Battery voltage test points
g)
Vents cabinet
h)
Battery over current protection
MAIN FIRE ALARM COMMAND CENTRE. The main fire alarm command centre shall have the same features specified above, but it shall cater for all the circuit connected to it and shall communicate Page 10 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
with all the other stand alone panel with the possibility to control all sensors in the complete system, acknowledge and silence an alarm. The main fire alarm command centre shall be provided with a spare capacity. Main fire alarm command centre shall also be connected to the BMS system for alarm monitoring. Main fire alarm command centre shall be connected to the BMS system for communication with the stand alone fire alarm control panel of each building. FIRE ALARM REPEATER PANEL The fire alarm repeater panel shall consist of a LED and LCD display to annunciate all display on the main fire alarm command centre, the panel does not require to have any control feature. ADDRESSABLE PERIPHERAL NETWORK Communication with Addressable devices: The system must provide communication with all initiating and control devices individually. All of these devices are to be individually annunciated at the control panel. Annunciation shall include the following conditions for each point: a)
Alarm
b)
Trouble
c)
Open
d)
Short
e)
Ground
f)
Device Fail/Or Incorrect Device.
All addressable devices are to have the capability of being disabled or enabled individually. Addressable devices may be multidropped from a single pair of wires. Systems that require factory reprogramming to add or delete devices are unacceptable. FORMAT The communication format must be a poll/response protocol to allow t-tapping of the wire to addressable devices and be completely digital. A high degree of communication reliability must be obtained by using parity data bit error checking routines for address codes and check sum routines for the data transmission protocol. Systems that do not utilize full digital transmission protocol (i.e.; that may use time pulse width methods to transmit data etc.) will not be acceptable since they are considered unreliable and prone to errors. IDENTIFICATION OF ADDRESSABLE DEVICES
Page 11 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code entered on each device at time of installation. Hard wire addressable system shall be preferred in order to maintain the integrity of the system. Control pushbutton switches - for: alarm silence, alarm acknowledge, supervisory reset, display time and up to (4) control keys for programmable operation duplicating the control panel switches. A key “enable” deactivates the control switches. Tone alert - Duplicates the control panel tone alert during alarm & trouble conditions: System trouble LED Power on LED FIRE FIGHTER’S TELEPHONE SYSTEM System consist of Master Telephone set, Remote Telephone sets, Remote master telephone, Telephone interface modules, power supply, all required cabling, control, pull boxes, terminations etc Master telephone set along with the required no. of telephone interface modules, LED/LCD indication, control switches, power supply etc shall be part of the main fire alarm control panel located in the ground floor. One no. remote master telephone shall be provided at a location to consultant approval. System shall provide two way communication between Master and remote fire fighters telephones. It shall be a 100 % reliable system suitable for application during active fire fighting conditions, fire alarm investigation, fire alarm system inspection and testing. The Master telephone connects directly into a telephone interface module. A push to talk switch provides the operator with voice input control . Master telephone uses local LED/LCD indication and switch module to select telephone circuits and to silence any subsequent call ins until selected. Remote telephone can call into the master by either being taken off hook or by plugged into a telephone jack provided for the purpose. There shall be ring in tone with a visible LED/LCD indicator for each telephone circuit, and a switch control to select the calling telephone circuit. Telephone circuits shall be supervised for opens, shorts, and overload conditions. The master telephone shall be supervised for broken cord or off hook. Remote telephones shall be provided as cabinet mounted. Each hears a ring tone when a call in is selected and a hold tone when placed on hold. System shall be wired in class A configuration. Size and type of cabling shall be as per system manufacturer’s recommendations and to consultant approval. Page 12 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
FIRE FIGHTERS SMOKE CONTROL STATION (FSCS) Fire fighter’s smoke control station (FSCS) shall be part of the fire alarm control panel and shall be located at the fire control room. The control station shall include the following features: a)
The fire fighter’s smoke control station shall provide full monitoring and manual control capability over all smoke control systems and equipment.
b)
Equipment shall include but not limited to the following: i.
Smoke Extract Fans.
ii.
Staircase Pressurization Fans
iii.
Makeup Air Fans
iv.
Motorized dampers of the various sub system including makeup air ducts, smoke extract ducts etc.
c)
The control station shall have the highest priority control over all smoke control systems and equipment. Where manual controls are also provided at other building locations for control of smoke control systems, the control mode selected from the FSCS should prevail. FSCS control should override or bypass other building controls such as hand off auto and start/stop switches located on fan motor controllers, and controls intended to protect against electrical overloads, provide for personnel safety, and prevent major system damage.
d)
The fire fighters smoke control station shall contain a building diagram that clearly indicates the type and location of all smoke control equipment (fans, dampers, etc.). The building areas affected by the equipment shall also be clearly indicated.
e)
The actual status of the systems and equipment that are activated or are capable of activation for smoke control shall be clearly indicated at the fire fighters smoke control station.
f)
Status indication shall be provided for on and off status of each individual fan used for smoke control. ‘ON’ status should be sensed by pressure difference as proof of airflow.
g)
Contractor shall install all the required control and monitoring modules, relays, for each contactors and power supply etc every system components to be controlled.
h)
Fire rated cables shall be used for the system installation.
PERIPHERAL DEVICES The automatic fire detectors shall be fixed to the installation by mean of plug-in bases. Page 13 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
The two bases shall have a mechanical device enabling the base to be set to accept only one of the four main type of detectors, i.e. ionisation smoke, optical smoke, infra-red flame and heat. The bases shall incorporate the optional feature of being able to lock the detectors in place once plugged in. The addressable base must incorporate all the electronics circuitry required for communicating detector status to the Control Panel. Addressable detectors and addressable modules shall be able to transmit to the Control Panel a pre-set and unique identifier to detect unauthorised changes in the system configuration. The manufacturer shall have suitable equipment to test and replace all four main types of automatic detectors. The manufacturer shall have available intrinsically safe modules for automatic detectors, the plug-in bases, line isolator & Interface modules. Detectors with built in microchip complying with the performance specified hereafter is equally acceptable. PHOTO ELECTRIC DETECTORS a)
The photoelectric smoke detectors shall be capable of detecting smoke from fires. The detectors shall have 360 degree smoke entry.
b)
The Photo electric smoke detectors shall be U.L listed
c)
The design of the optical smoke detectors sensing chamber shall be optimised to minimise the effect of the dust deposits over a period of time
d)
The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate screens designed to prevent all but the very small insects from entering the sensing chamber.
e)
The optical smoke detectors shall include RFI screening and feed-through connecting components to minimise the effect of radiated and conducted electrical interference.
f)
The optical smoke detectors shall be incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the outside, to provide indication of alarm actuation.
g)
The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate a magnetically operated functional test facility.
h)
The optical smoke detectors shall have EMI/RFI shielded electrons.
i)
The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate an LED clearly visible from the outside, to provide indication of alarm and normal conditions.
HEAT DETECTORS Page 14 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
a)
The heat detectors shall be capable of self restoring and providing rate of rise and fixed temperature sensing.
b)
The heat detectors shall be U.L listed
c)
The heat detectors shall employ two heat-sensing elements with different thermal characteristics to provide a rate of rise dependent response.
d)
The temperature sensing elements and circuitry of the heat detectors shall be coated with epoxy resin to provide environmental protection.
e)
The heat detectors shall incorporate a magnetically operated functional test facility.
f)
The heat detectors shall have EMI/RFI shielded electrons.
g)
The heat detectors shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the outside, to provide indication of alarm and normal conditions.
MANUAL BREAK GLASS CALL POINT a)
The manual call points shall monitor and signal to the Control Panel the status of a switch operated by a ‘break glass’ assembly with N.O/N.C contacts.
b)
The manual call points shall be U.L approved.
c)
The manual call points shall be capable of operating by means of thumb pressure and not require a hammer.
d)
The manual call points shall be field programmable to be alert or evacuation. The manual call points shall be capable of being tested using a special ‘key’ without the need for shattering the glass.
e)
f)
The addressable manual call points shall have built in electronics with dip switch for addressing.
g)
The conventional manual call points shall be connected to addressable loop through interface modules.
h)
The conventional break glass units to be provided in non-conditioned areas such as workshop area and as shown on drawings.
ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE MODULES a)
The addressable contact interface module shall provide monitoring of the status of switched input signals from either normally open contacts from conventional devices.
b)
The addressable contact monitoring module shall be capable of deriving its power directly from the addressable loop or from the control panel. Page 15 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
c)
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
The addressable contact monitoring module shall be enclosed in a prefabricated enclosure.
LINE ISOLATOR MODULE a)
The line isolator module shall provide protection on the addressable loop by automatically disconnecting the section of wiring between two modules where a short-circuit has occurred.
b)
The line isolator module shall derive power directly from addressable loop
c)
The line isolator module shall be installed for every 15 devices and as shown in layout drawings.
CIRCUIT PROTECTOR Circuit protector shall be provided on all fire alarm external wiring. To protect the system against lightning or high transient voltage. The protector shall be located as close as practicable to the point at which the circuit leave or enter a building. The circuit protector shall have line to line response time of less than 1 nano second and capable of accepting greater than 2000 Ampere at 28 volt. BEAM DETECTOR The Beam Detector shall be microprocessor based and shall have automatic gain control and temperature compensation. The separate transmitter/receiver shall be capable of long range coverage up to 100 Meter and have six sensitivity level settings. The detector shall include normal, alarm and trouble LED indicators, A remote indicator and test unit shall be installed at low level in the corridor to indicate the status of the beam detector and which will be used to test the alarm function of the detector. PHOTOELECTRIC DUCT MOUNTED DETECTOR Photoelectric duct sensors shall be of the solid state photoelectric type and shall operate on the light scattering, photodiode principle. To minimize nuisance alarms, detectors shall have a 30 mesh insect screen and be designed to ignore invisible particles or smoke densities that are below the factory set point. No radioactive material shall be used. FIRE ALARM SOUNDER a)
The fire alarm sounder shall be U.L listed
b)
The fire alarm sounder shall be wired directly from the panel in Multi circuit. Page 16 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
c)
The fire alarm sounder circuits shall be complete with end of line resistors for maintaining purpose.
d)
The fire alarm sounder shall be of the light weight Aluminium alloy construction, water proof and painted red.
e)
The sounder shall be vibrating type with low current consumption
f)
The sounder shall be 6” heavy duty suitable for internal and external operation as required.
g)
It shall give a minimum sound level of 90 dB at 1 meter.
h)
The fire alarm sounder shall be controlled from the loop. Sequencing of sounder controls, shall be determined during construction and can be programmed at control panel.
j)
Fire alarm sounder shall be addressable wherever indicated in the drawing
FIRE ALARM SOUNDER WITH STROBE LIGHT a)
Audible/Visible notification appliance combines a high intensity strobe with a low current electronic horn.
b)
Horn output shall be a steady harmonically rich sound that can be easily coded by the controlling notification appliance circuit.
c)
24V DC operation
d)
UL listed or approved equal.
e)
Strobe light shall be of xenon with impact resistant polycarbonate lens.
f)
Strobe light intensity shall be selected from manufactures standard product range depending on the location where it shall be installed and the area coverage. It shall not be less than 30 candela.
g)
It shall be of surface mounting/semi flush mounting.
h)
Minimum sound level shall be as PE UL464.
TEMPERATURE Control Panel
:
0° C to 48° C
Peripheral Devices
:
10° C to 50° C (For conventional devices). 0° C to 49° C (Addressable devices)
Humidity
:
95%
Outdoor Equipment
:
IP65.
Page 17 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
2.0
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM Fire alarm system of the main building shall be provided with a fully integrated digital emergency voice evacuation system. System shall support up to eight independent audio channels over a single pair of wires. System shall include but not limited to the following: a)
Notification appliances such as ceiling speakers, wall mounted speakers, speakers with strobes, etc
b)
Distributed zoned audio amplifiers one for each speaker circuit
c)
Paging microphone, digital message playback unit, Digital Audio controllers, on board tone generators, all required audio zone control and audio control input modules, power supply, battery etc in the main fire control panels.
d)
Switches, and LED indications for each speaker circuit zone to allow emergency voice communication selection for Evacuation, Alert and Paging, and all other switches/indications etc arranged on the fire alarm control panel.
The system shall be capable of selecting the proper tones and phrases based upon specific conditions and location, sort and transmit the audible information and repeat the transmission as many times as required. The system shall have the ability to generate pre-programmed digitized phrases, words and alarm tones to all or specific areas of the building. The message contained in the fully digitized message unit shall have the facility to be edited and modified or even recorded in the field via a normal computer. System shall have the capability of massage splicing. Massage splicing shall allow the system to announciate specific zone and/or device numbers while system is in testing mode, and shall also allow the system to announciate coded massages informing the security personnel about the Fire Condition in specific zone or device. One-way communications of announcements and messages originating at the Fire Control Room shall be via speakers located throughout the building. Speaker shall be wired in class "A" for each floor. One dedicated amplifier shall be available for each speaker circuit. Each Amplifier shall have it’s own independent built-in back-up amplifier. The system shall have the ability to automatically or manually sound the evacuation tone on the floor of alarm, while at the same time being able to sound the first stage alert tone or voice instruction to other areas of the building.
Page 18 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
The system shall be configured to allow voice paging. Upon activation of any speaker manual control switch, the alarm tone shall be sounded over all speakers in that group. The control panel operator shall be able to make announcements via the pushto-talk paging microphone over the pre-selected speakers. Facility for total building paging shall be accomplished by the means of an “All Call” switch. MICROPHONE The Microphones shall be a push-to-talk, dynamic noise canceling type with a frequency response from 200 to 2,000 HZ. Any automatic alarm, which has been in operation, shall be overridden by the use of the microphone. When the manual voice announcements are completed the system shall revert back to the previous alarm unless reset or restored to normal by authorities in charge. AMPLIFIER All amplifiers shall be sized to accommodate the speaker load plus an additional 20% spare per speaker zone to accommodate future addition. Minimum 2 watt shall be considered for each speaker in sizing the amplifier. Voltage ( 25V, 70.7V ) and power rating of the amplifiers shall be as per system manufacturer recommendations. Size and type of power and control cables for the speaker circuits shall be selected accordingly. The amplifier shall be continuously supervised for proper operation. Each audio power amplifier shall have integral audio signal de-multiplexes, allowing the amplifier to select any one of eight digitized audio channels. The channel selection shall be directed by the system software. Up to 8 multiple and different audio signals must be able to broadcast simultaneously from the same system network panel. Amplifiers shall have built-in Back-up amplifier. Incase of Primary amplifier failure, speakers circuits shall automatically gets connected to back-up amplifier and system operation continues without interruption. In the event of a total loss of audio data communications, all amplifiers will default to the local "HORN" tone. If the local panel has an alarm condition, then all amplifiers will sound the Horn signal on their connected speaker circuits. Audio amplifiers shall automatically detect a short circuit condition on the connected speaker circuit wiring, and shall inhibit itself from driving into that short circuit condition. Frequency range:
200 Hz to 12 KHz
SPEAKERS Ceiling recessed speakers and wall mounted speakers shall be provided in the corridors/common areas as indicated in the relevant drawings.
Page 19 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
All speakers shall be listed to UL1480. The speakers shall have taps for ¼, ½, 1, and 2 watts. Multiple tap speaker having taps up to 4 watt shall be provided if required. All speakers shall have high impact, flame retardant housings. Ceiling speakers shall be of white/off white, and wall mounted speakers shall be of white or red to local authority approval. Frequency response:
400 Hz to 4000Hz or better
Sound Pressure Level at 1W as per UL1480 test:
84 dBA at 10 feet
Humidity
95%
Temperature range
0 to 40 degree C
SPEAKER / STROBE It combines a multi tapped speaker ( as specified above ) and an individually addressed strobe to provide audio/tone notification and visible notification from the same unit. Speaker with strobe shall be provided as indicated in the relevant drawings. Speaker/strobes shall have a synchronized strobe light with multiple candela taps in addition to the speaker having characteristics specified above. The strobe light taps shall be adjustable for 15/75,30/75, 75 and 110 candela. When activated, the strobe shall flash at a synchronized rate It shall be UL listed to standard 1971, and standard 1480. Temperature range:
0 to 50 degree C
Humidity
93%
High impact, flame retardant housing and shall be red or white to local authority requirements. Speakers shall be wired separately from the addressable strobe wiring. AUDIO CONTROLLER INPUT MODULES System Audio Controller shall have the Input modules to interface with Background Music Inputs. System will be used for normal Public Address operation during normal hours. In case of Fire Alarm, all background music inputs will be muted and highest priority Evacuation massage will be transmitted to area of Fire and Alert Messages to other areas. Each input shall be provided with volume control to control the input level of background music sources. 3.0
GRAPHIC COMMAND CENTER A colour graphic command center shall be installed in control room. When a fire alarm status changes, colour graphics shall display an indication of the type of alarm or other activity and its location. The operator then uses the mouse control Page 20 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
to access a more detailed view of the alarmed zone or device. With proper access code, the operator shall be able to acknowledge alarm conditions, silence audible alarms and extinguish visible notification appliances, and perform system reset directly from the colour graphic screens. GCC shall accommodate upto 4 network card and each network capable of accomodating upto 99 notes. The graphic command center shall use IBM compatible PC The PC shall have a Pentium IV processor operating at 2 GHz minimum, 512 MB RAM, 40GB HDD and a 17" SVGA monitor with graphics hardware acceleration. The PC and Peripherals shall be from manufacturer such as Dell, Compaq etc. Locally assembled equipment will not be accepted. It shall provide history logging upto 400,000 historical events, on line A4 laser printer capable of printing at a speed of at least 10ppm. Graphics shall also be exchanged to control workstation. 4.0
INSTALLATION Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable codes, local authority requirements and the manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC - Article 760 A and C, Power-Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits or if required may be reclassified as non-power limited and wired in accordance with NEC-Article 760 A and B. Upon completion, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the Consultant and general contractor. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled "Fire Alarm". Wiring colour code shall be maintained throughout the installation. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors. The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm equipment after completion of the installation. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide on site supervision of installation. TYPE OF CABLES Fire resistant FP200 cables complying with BS 6387 Category CWZ shall be used for the wiring of the fire alarm system. The cabling shall be carried out in class A configuration. Cable running through walls, ceilings, roofs etc shall be provided with fire stops. CABLING AND WIRING The installation of all wiring, cable and equipment shall be in accordance with NFPA 70. National Electric Code and specifically with Article 760, Fire Protection signaling systems and in accordance with the local codes and standards. Wiring for the fire detection and alarm system shall be segregated from all lighting and power systems. Page 21 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Wiring within any control equipment shall be readily accessible without removing any components or parts. All internal fire alarm cabling shall be fire resistant FP 200 cables or equal. Wiring for 240 V AC power to each FCP shall be minimum 2.5 mm2. Wiring for all bell circuits shall be minimum 2.5 mm2 and wiring for all signaling circuits shall be minimum 1.5 mm2. Wiring between FCP’s and ACP’s shall be minimum 2.5 mm2 and shall be armoured. Wiring between FCP’s for networking shall be 1.5 mm2 twisted pairs cables. Wiring for the telephone circuits shall be minimum 1.5 sq.mm twisted. Wiring for the speaker circuits shall be minimum 1.5 sq.mm twisted and shall meet UL 2196 requirements. All cabling shall be concealed in the building fabric for all conditioned areas. Fire alarm system cables shall be installed using PVC conduits embedded in the slab/wall. All surface mounted installation shall be using GI conduits. Exposed installation of fire alarm system cable is not acceptable. Where cables pass through walls or floors, then shall be protected by galvanized steel sleeves. 5.0
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING PRELIMINARY TESTS Upon the completion of the installation, the system shall be subject to functional and operation performance tests including test of each installed initiating and notification appliance. Tests shall include the meggering of all system conductors to determine that the system is free from grounded, shorted or open circuits. The megger test shall be conducted prior to the installation of fire alarm equipment. If deficiencies are found corrections shall be made and the system shall be retested to assure that it functions. ACCEPTANCE TEST Provide the service of competent, factory – trained Engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and commissioning of the system. Testing shall be in full accordance with NEPA 72 Section 7.2.2 :
Page 22 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
a)
Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, earth faults, continuity and insulation.
b)
Verify activation of all flow switches.
c)
Open initiating device circuits and verify that the fault signal actuates.
d)
Open signaling line circuits and verify that the fault signal actuates.
e)
Open and short indicating appliance circuits and verify that fault signal actuates.
f)
Earth initiating device circuits and verify response of fault signals.
g)
Earth signaling line circuits and verify response of fault signals.
h)
Earth indicating appliance circuits and verify response of fault signals.
i)
Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.
j)
Check installation, supervision and operation of all intelligent smoke sensors during a walk test.
k)
Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the Fire Panel and the correct activation of the control points.
CONDUCTOR TESTING Prior to connection of the equipment all conductors shall be tested in the following manner. Verify absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors. Insulation test : To ensure that all conductor other than those intentionally connected together and completely isolated. SYSTEM TESTING Verify that the control unit is in the normal supervisory condition as detailed in the manufacturers manual. Test each initiating device and indicating appliance for alarm operation and trouble indication. Test the operation of control module for proper response Test all primary power supplies. Test all secondary power supply Page 23 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Verify that each test signal is properly reported and received at the main fire alarm panel. Functional tests to verify the interfacing details with all other systems as described in item ‘1.2.description of works’ and confirm whether the interfacing logic and sequence of operation is as per Consultant approved programme. Fire Alarm Schedule to be completed by the Vendor during tender. schedule to be completed for each panel Control Panel Features Operator’s Panel: LCD Keypad Programmable Control Keys Supervisory LED Printer Total I/O Point Capacity Conventional Circuits: Initiating Circuits Indicating Appliance Auxiliary Relay with built in feedback No. of Loops Number Distance (Style 4) Addressable points Meters System Battery Industry Listings UL 864 (fire) NFPA 72 Series FM Software Features Field configurable Passcode levels Custom labels Time Control Alarm verification – by group One man walk test by group silent with log with zone indication Historical log alarm events trouble events Trouble reminder – programmable Addressable Devices Feature: Detectors Photoelectric Heat Duct Analog Page 24 of 25
Response
One
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 15 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Control Panel Features Address Location Base Interchangeable heads W/alarm LED W/remote LED output W/auxiliary relay W/sounder Manual Station Control Modules Isolator Module
Response
Page 25 of 25
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 1 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
INDEX
1.0
CCTV SYSTEM
Page 2 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
1.1
IP CAMERA DOME FEATURES
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
The IP camera dome shall transmit high quality video across the network for remote viewing and recording. It shall be powered by a proprietary digital video management system. The dome shall have a maximum video transmission rate of 30 fps (25 fps PAL) at 640 x 480 pixels (768 x 576 PAL). The dome shall use optimized proprietary compression based on MPEG4 that optimizes data and maximizes picture quality. Simultaneous transmission of multiple channel video across the LAN and WAN (Internet) to connected network digital video recorders and master workstations shall be provided. The dome shall be configurable remotely from network digital video recorders and master workstations. Single channel audio for communications and recording shall be provided. The dome shall be capable of 5 simultaneous viewing/recording streams per camera. Museum Search (Smart Search) feature shall scan hours of video in minutes. MD5 128-bit algorithm video authentication shall ensure data integrity. The LAN interface shall be 100 Mbps, TCP/IP Unicast. Video Bandwidth shall be 1.5 Mbps (per video stream), nominal. Up to 16 cameras shall be able to be displayed on a remote workstation. Adjustment of fps according to network performance capability shall not sacrifice quality. Control of operation and recording from a macro shall be available. Levels of user authorization for different functions shall be provided. Remote software updates for the camera dome and the IP version shall be available. Watch dog option shall cause a reboot when system is not responding. PTZ control from application over Ethernet shall be provided. Alarm report shall be able to run a response macro. External alarms shall be provided. DHCP support shall be provided.
Page 3 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
Definition of movement in a specific area (region-of-interest) from a workstation shall available. Video motion detection shall be provided. An embedded self-supported OS shall be provided. 1.2
Standard Indoor Camera Dome Features The motorized dome shall have internal CPU-circuitry that shall provide for an external power supply input, four alarm inputs, one relay output and communications wiring. Onboard memory shall be retained in the housing; installation and servicing shall be easy. Alarm inputs shall be individually programmable for their functional state (enabled or disabled), reporting state (report on or off), active state (high or low), acknowledge mode (manual, momentary or automatic), automatic acknowledge dwell time control, set and reset action (action when triggered or reset) and displayed title text. The relay output shall be programmable for its power-on state (on or off), output type (momentary or latching) and displayed title text. Programmable titling shall be provided for the camera and every preset position, alarm, relay, and sector. Titles shall be enabled or disabled individually or globally. The overall position of the titles and display frame position shall be programmable. The capability to fade titles after a programmable time shall be provided. There shall be 79 programmable preset positions available, each having a variable preset solve speed of 1 sec (nominal) and accuracy of 0.23°. The dome's 360 degree view shall be programmable for a maximum of 16 sectors. Each sector shall have the capability to be blanked out (no video display). The number and size of sectors shall be programmable and have a custom title. There shall be four tours available with 32 steps per tour. Tour steps shall include preset positions with speed control, relay control, alarm acknowledge, save/recall camera status, repeat tour, call another tour, call an autotour and dwell timing control. Pan and tilt functions shall be externally controlled, continuously variable and programmable to be enabled or disabled manual pan limits shall be programmable. There shall be an autopan feature and it shall be programmable for its functional settings (enabled, disabled speed, limits). Maximum manual pan and tilt speeds shall be programmable. Maximum pan speed shall be 120 degrees/sec and maximum tilt speed shall be 90 degrees/sec. Pan and tilt speeds shall also be scalable to the zoom setting. The zoom function speed shall be externally controlled using three settings, low, medium and high. The camera-lens module shall be a 1/4 inch, high-resolution color type. Camera sensitivity shall be 0.2 lux. The lens on the standard cameras shall have a maximum optical zoom setting of 22X and a maximum digital zoom setting of 12X for a total zoom setting of 264X. Lens focal length shall be 4-88 mm with a maximum aperture of f/1.6. The digital zoom shall be programmable for its functional setting (enable/disable). An autoiris function with a manual override feature and an auto-focus function with functional setting control (enable/disable) shall also be provided. Page 4 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
In addition, the camera shall provide high level, programmable functions. The autoiris shall be adjustable. The shutter speed shall be automatic or manual. The automatic shutter speed shall work with an auto exposure feature. This feature can be set to operate with a fully automatic shutter speed or a fixed, selectable, linear speed. These features are called exposure priority or shutter priority. All color cameras shall have white balance gain using red and blue scales. Backlight compensation shall be programmable for its relative setting using a tuning value scale. Video line locking shall be provided with an internal crystal clock or a programmable vertical phase scale. The basic ceiling mounted version shall be designed to mount into any dropped or hard ceiling having the capacity to support the dome's weight. There shall be an optional mounting kit for ceilings not able to support the dome's weight. The indoor pendant version shall be mounted using a molded thermoplastic housing and 1-1/2 inch NPT threaded fitting. A real time clock shall be available. Multilanguage menu system shall be provided, including English, and Arabic. The camera dome system shall have the following mechanical specifications: 1. Dimensions: Indoor Ceiling Diameter: 7.1-in. (180 mm). Height: 9.7-in. (246 mm). Indoor Pendant Diameter: 8.0-in. (203 mm). Height: 10.0-in. (254 mm). 2. Weight: Indoor Ceiling: 5.1 lb (2.3 kg). Indoor Pendant: 4.7 lb (2.1 kg). Construction: Plastic, aluminum and steel. 4. Color: White housing, black trim ring, gray (smoked), chrome or gold dome for the indoor version, clear dome for the outdoor version. Environmental parameters shall be: 32 to 132° F (0 to 55° C). 1.3
Day/Night Outdoor Camera Dome Features The motorized dome shall have internal CPU-circuitry that shall provide for an external power supply input, four alarm inputs, one relay output and communications wiring. Onboard memory shall be retained in the housing; installation and servicing shall be easy. Alarm inputs shall be individually programmable for their functional state (enabled or disabled), reporting state (report on or off), active state (high or low), acknowledge mode (manual, momentary or automatic), automatic acknowledge dwell time control, set and reset action (action when triggered or reset) and displayed title text. The relay output shall be programmable for its power-on state (on or off), output type (momentary or latching) and displayed title text. Programmable titling shall be provided for the camera and every preset position, alarm, relay, and sector.
Page 5 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
Titles shall be enabled or disabled individually or globally. The overall position of the titles and display frame position shall be programmable. The capability to fade titles after a programmable time shall be provided. There shall be 79 programmable preset positions available, each having a variable preset solve speed of 1 sec (nominal) and accuracy of 0.23°. The dome's 360 degree view shall be programmable for a maximum of 16 sectors. Each sector shall have the capability to be blanked out (no video display). The number and size of sectors shall be programmable and have a custom title. There shall be eight tours available with 32 steps per tour. Tour steps shall include preset positions with speed control, relay control, alarm acknowledge, save/recall camera status, repeat tour, call another tour, call an autotour and dwell timing control. There shall be two autotours available with 256 pan, tilt and zoom functions per autotour. Timing shall be dynamic or as is actually programmed with the joystick and push buttons. Pan and tilt functions shall be externally controlled, continuously variable and programmable to be enabled or disabled manual pan limits shall be programmable. There shall be an autopan feature and it shall be programmable for its functional settings (enabled, disabled speed, limits). Maximum manual pan and tilt speeds shall be programmable. Maximum pan speed shall be 360 degrees/sec and maximum tilt speed shall be 150 degrees/sec. Pan and tilt speeds shall also be scalable to the zoom setting. The zoom function speed shall be externally controlled using three settings, low, medium and high. The camera-lens module shall be a 1/4 inch, high-resolution color type. Camera sensitivity shall be 0.0019 fc (0.02 lux). The lens on the day/night cameras shall have a maximum optical zoom setting of 23X and a maximum digital zoom setting of 12X for a total zoom setting of 276. Lens focal length shall be 3.6-82.8 mm, with a maximum aperture of f/1.6. The digital zoom shall be programmable for its functional setting (enable/disable). An autoiris function with a manual override feature and an auto-focus function with functional setting control (enable/disable) shall also be provided. The 23X camera shall feature wide dynamic range to provide the highest quality image with excellent contrast. In addition, the camera shall provide high level, programmable functions. The autoiris and AGC shall be adjustable. The shutter speed shall be automatic or manual. The automatic shutter speed shall work with an auto exposure feature. This feature can be set to operate with a fully automatic shutter speed or a fixed, selectable, linear speed. These features are called exposure priority or shutter priority. All color cameras shall have white balance gain using red and blue scales. Backlight compensation shall be programmable for its relative setting using a tuning value scale. Video line locking shall be provided with an internal crystal clock or a programmable vertical phase scale. The outdoor pendant model shall be mounted using a die cast aluminum housing and 1-1/2 inch NPT threaded fitting and shall include a molded thermoplastic sunshield and additional environmental control. A real time clock and scheduler shall be available on all models. Up to 64 events shall be able to be scheduled for action at a programmed time of day. Events that may be scheduled include a preset, turning a relay on or off, enabling or disabling an alarm, and calling a tour or an autotour Page 6 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
16 individual zoom-scalable programmable privacy masks shall be available. Programmable azimuth and compass display shall be available. The compass shall be programmed for absolute North and shall display 8 compass headings (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, NW). Pan and tilt degrees shall be displayed with a 1° resolution. Motion detection capability shall be available for the day/night camera. For each preset, there are 6 programmable zones for motion detection. Each zone has 3 sensitivity levels. Programmable actions may be associated with each detection zone, including calling another preset, turning a relay on or off, and calling a tour or an autotour. The capability to freeze an image during a preset solve shall be available on the day/night cameras. The control shall be global and affect all preset solves. The freeze of an image during solve has advantages when recording using a motion compensated recording system (DVR). The capability to flip (invert) the video image shall be available on the day/night cameras. This feature is useful when mounting units in an inverted position. All pan/tilt and compass displays are automatically adjusted for the inverted image. Multilanguage menu system shall be provided, including English, and Arabic. The camera dome system shall have the following mechanical specifications: 1. Dimensions: Outdoor Pendant Diameter: 9.0-in. (228 mm). Height: 10.3-in. (262 mm). Lower Dome Diameter: 5.9-in. (150 mm). 2. Weight: Outdoor Pendant: 7.7 lb (3.5 kg). 3. Construction: Plastic, aluminum and steel. 4. Color: White housing, black trim ring, clear dome for the outdoor version. Environmental parameters shall be: -29 to 165° F (-34 to 74° C) in accordance with NEMA 2.1.5.1 STD 2; -40 to 132° F (-40 to 55° C) continuous rotation. Indoor, In-Ceiling, Color Fixed-Position Camera Domes The fixed camera dome shall incorporate a fixed camera and auto iris varifocal lens combination. The camera domes shall be available for indoor in-ceiling mounting configurations. A smoked lower dome shall be included. The camera position shall have a four direction adjustment, allowing for adjustment of pan, tilt, vertical height in the dome and lens rotation (roll), for any angle of view required. The color camera shall accept 24 VAC power input and shall offer line lock capability. The camera shall be a 1/3-inch format CCD camera. The color cameras shall have 540 TV lines resolution and 0.019 fc (0.2 lux) sensitivity.
Page 7 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
All cameras shall have electronic shutter and shall be fitted with a 3-6 mm auto iris varifocal lens. Input Voltage Current Rating Power Consumption Connectors Video Output Impedance Scanning System R. F. Emission Rating Tilt & Horizontal Adjustment Construction Operating Temp. Range Operating Humidity Image Device Resolution (TV lines) Sensitvity fc (lux) Electronic Iris (sec) Signal-to-Noise Ratio Focal Length (mm) 1.4.
: 13-28 VAC (24 VAC nominal), Non-isolated. : 300 mA at 24 VAC. : 7.2 W. : Power: 3-pin terminal block. Video: BNC, : 75 ohms. : CCIR/PAL: 625 lines, 50 fields/sec. : FCC Class A. : 4 axis adjustment, pan, tilt, vertical height and roll : Plastic and steel. : 35 to 104° F (2 to 40° C). : Up to 90% relative, noncondensing. : 1/3" ExView™ CCD, 2:1 interlace, : 460 : 0.019 (0.2) at 25 IRE, f/1.2 : 1/60 (1/50)-1/100,000 : >48 dB (AGC off) : 3-6 varifocal with auto iris
Fixed IP Cameras The camera shall be a 1/4-inch solid-state high-resolution color video camera using an interline transfer charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensor with DSP (Digital Signal Processing). The television operating system available shall be PAL. The pickup device shall have over 437,000 pixel array (752 horizontal, 582 vertical). RJ-45 Ethernet connector for connection to the Ethernet network directly. It shall be compatible with auto-iris lenses with self-contained auto iris control circuits and provide screw terminals for cable connection to this type of lens. It also shall have an internal auto iris control circuit for use with DC-drive auto iris lenses and shall provide a built-in connector for this lens type. It shall accept lenses having both C- and CS-type mounts. Camera mounting provisions shall include a 1/4-20 threaded hole. Top and bottom mounting shall be provided. Horizontal resolution shall be 540 TV lines. Signal-to-noise ratio shall be greater than 48 dB (AGC off). A gray scale of 256 shall be provided. The camera shall incorporate a color balance sensor which reads the color temperature of the light through the lens. Through-the-lens white balance for color temperatures shall be automatic (3000 - 7000 K).
Page 8 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
The electronic iris control mode shall be an automatic linear shutter 1/50 to 1/100,000 sec. At an output level of usable video (25 IRE), the camera shall have a sensitivity of 0.035 fc (0.38 lux) at standard gain and 0.02 fc (0.42 lux) at high gain. (Conditions: scene illumination, f/1.2 lens, 89.9% scene highlight reflectance.) Backlight compensation shall be switch-selectable on or off. Synchronization shall be power lines phase locking (line-locking) with vertical phase adjustment or internal crystal. The camera shall conform to the radiation standards of FCC Class A and IEC1146-1 standard for non-broadcast signal-sensor cameras. Input power for the camera shall be 24 V, 60 Hz (NTSC) or 24 V, 50 Hz (PAL) with entry through a screw terminal block. Power consumption shall not exceed 4 W. 1.5
Outdoor Fixed Camera Outdoor cameras shall have identical specifications to the indoor units, but shall be enclosed in weatherproof housings and installed on suitable mounts.
1.6
Lenses All lenses on fixed cameras shall be 1/3 inch format varifocal lenses with Auto iris to assure a good video image regardless of changes in scene illumination. Focal length of the lens shall be field selectable and shall vary between 3.5 - 8mm.
1.7
Digital Video Recording Management and Network Software The Digital Video Recording and Management Network Software shall meet the requirements of business and government surveillance applications. The software shall be unique and power a line of Digital Video Recorders, Servers and Workstations. The Software shall be available on CD-R format and provide a complete and comprehensive application for the operation and maintenance of the video surveillance system. It shall provide full live digital video and audio surveillance over a standard 100Base-T network by the use of a GUI incorporating video display areas, toolbars, control palettes, and site/device trees. The Software shall also be available preloaded in a Workstation. This workstation shall be a preconfigured state-of-the-art PC ready to review and record video over the LAN and WAN (Internet), with proper registration. The software shall offer network connectivity to other family components that share all video and control data over the Ethernet network. The number of network-connected components is only limited to the number of assigned IP addresses. The software, without any degradation to video quality, shall simultaneously offer: 16-Channel continuous video playback. 16-Channel video playback transmission to the Ethernet network. Page 9 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
16-Channel continuous video receiving from the Ethernet network. User selectable video archiving of pre-existing recording. The operating system of the software shall be Microsoft® WindowsXP™ Professional. Network Setup: Standard network protocol type using IP addressing scheme. Site Authorization: Workstation can be setup using remote recorder or workstation GUI. Site name and authorization can be established by User and Group. Permissions can be assigned for all system functions. Macro Create & Edit: System macros can be added, edited, and deleted using the recorder's cameras and detectors. In addition, within macros, alarms can be sent and remote macros run. Alarm Setup: Recorder alarms can be established by adding detectors and configuring motion detection on video. The triggering of the recorder's detectors is used to send alarms to remote units. In addition, detectors can be edited and deleted. Device Settings: The Server's cameras, microphones and sensors can be named. Cameras can be setup as PTZ types and full descriptions can be assigned. Authentication: The video from the recorder's cameras can be enabled to view the Authentication status symbol (A) on the displayed video. The software shall employ a compression algorithm based on: Optimized MPEG4 and JPEG. User selectable resolution (quality) not requiring a need to restart the application or the digital video recorder. It shall be selectable using a 4-position bar, from the Main Screen. There shall be 4 levels of resolution (Frame, Field, CIF, and HCIF) with 2 levels of compression (Normal, Full) comprising 8 quality levels total, which shall be accessible from the Setup menu selections. The networked system shall be comprised of: The software platform. Recorders. Workstations. The software installed in both recorders and workstations shall be similar in: Graphical User Interface, therefore an operator shall need to learn only one interface for both control and programming of the system. Functions, offering the ability to remotely configure most system components from any recorder or workstation.
Page 10 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
The software shall offer features including the simultaneous display, playback, distribution and archive of multiple channel video and audio. It shall collect multiple channels of analog video and digitize them for the purpose of display, archive and requested distribution across the Ethernet network. Cameras, microphones and sensors shall be the primary analog input devices. Each channel of video and audio data shall have the capability of being displayed, played back, distributed and archived simultaneously across several servers and clients across the network. Each sensor channel shall support a NO or NC device. The software shall also have full WAN and Internet capability, offering expandability beyond a corporate LAN. Authorization rights setup shall be performed using the Site Authorization screen. Group rights shall be available to configure, by specific site. Rights shall provide authority to perform all system functions. The software shall offer a full multi-user authorization process as follows: User groups shall be created once globally and shall function in all components connected to the network. Users shall be created once globally and shall be given rights to particular groups. Groups shall be authorized and given specific access to each unit, permitting "functionspecific" profiles. Users created and authorized for each machine shall be able to login to any recorder and workstation and automatically have their group rights for that machine follow them. There shall be no virtual limit on the number of Groups and Users that can be authorized in the software. The software shall allow for each group to be authorized or denied access, per component, to: Login. Logout. Setup: Network Setup & Site Name. User and Group Management. Site Authorization. Auto Login. Macro - Create & Edit. Alarm Setup. Authentication Settings. Device Setup. Pre & Post Alarm. Storage Database Utilities. Auto Record. Exit to OS. RS-232 Setup. Priority Setup. Registration Setup. Manual Record Setup. Scheduler for Macros. Page 11 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
Reports. Scheduler/Macro. Shutdown/Close. Record. Stop. Change Quality. Picture. Export. Print. Controls. Live View. Playback. PTZ All users created shall be able to Login to any workstation on the system. A user, given appropriate access, shall be able to remotely configure all components connected to the network. The programming shall include the complete operation of the recorders, including but not limited to: Camera titles. Alarm conditions. System reports. PTZ Control. Relays. Alarms. The Main Window shall provide the following: The Site and Device Tree depicting all recorders, servers and workstations connected to the network. Within the Site and Device Tree, each unit shall be depicted with all connected devices such as: Cameras connected, differentiating between PTZ and fixed cameras. Microphones. A multiscreen display area that allows for screen displays of: Single Camera. Quad. 3 x 3. 4 x 4. 6 way. Full screen of any of the above selected multi screens shall allow for the viewing of the particular multiscreen in full screen mode by hiding the graphical user interface. PTZ Controls: When a dome camera is selected, an operator shall be able to : Control pan, tilt, zoom, iris and focus. Execute preset positions. Page 12 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
Program preset positions. Complete programming of menus embedded in the selected dome. All PTZ programming and control shall be achieved remotely without requiring an operator to be present at the recorder the PTZ camera is connected to. PTZ control shall be performed dynamically onscreen, not requiring an operator to click on arrows to move the PTZ camera. The PTZ control shall be fully variable by dynamically moving the cursor across the video display. Access to all programming menus. User selectable resolution shall include capture sizes of: 320 x 120 pixels, 384 x 144, PAL. 320 x 240 pixels, 384 x 288, PAL. 640 x 240 pixels, 768 x 288, PAL. 640 x 480 pixels, 768 x 576, PAL. On-demand recording of video currently viewed shall allow for the recording of any camera from any recorder connected to the network. The Site and Device Tree shall provide a physical list of all known network site areas and connected cameras, PTZ cameras and microphones. The cameras, PTZ cameras and microphones shall be represented by graphical symbols. Components in the Site and Device Tree shall be selectable and configurable. PTZ controls shall offer: When a dome camera is selected, an operator shall be able to: Control Pan, Tilt, Zoom, Iris and Focus. Execute preset positions. Program preset positions. Complete programming of menus embedded in the selected dome. All PTZ programming and control shall be achieved remotely without requiring an operator to be physically located at the recorder the PTZ is connected to. PTZ control shall be performed on the video screen without the need for an operator to click on any arrows depicting direction of the device to be moved. The PTZ control shall be fully variable and shall permit an operator to obtain higher pan and tilt speeds by simply clicking-and-dragging the mouse cursor on the video screen. Viewing of live cameras shall be performed by: Clicking on the desired camera in the Site and Device Tree. "Drag-and-drop" operations of cameras from the Site and Device Tree to the appropriate multiscreen space. "Drag-and-drop" operation of the recorder from the Site and Device Tree to the appropriate multiscreen space. The software shall permit viewing of live video from: Any camera connected to any recorder on the network. Page 13 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
The software shall allow for duplicate recording over the network. All workstations shall be able to simultaneously record: All cameras physically connected to recorders at a maximum of: 240 fps at 640 x 480 pixel resolution, 768 x 576, PAL (depending on the recorder utilized). The Navigator Window shall graphically display recorded video. It shall contain all function buttons necessary to access the video on-screen. These functions include but are not limited to: A scalable timeline shall be available to define "from" and "to" time/date intervals of video and audio. Cameras and microphones shall be selected from the Navigator Tree and displayed in the timeline. The display mode shall be selected from a palette to configure the number of cameras played back. A "Create AVI" button shall be used to create an AVI type file of the selected single camera video segment. A "Museum Search" button shall be available to search selected video segments for "Area of Interest" AOI events using a scalable sensitivity setting. A Play button shall be available to display the Main Window with the Video Display Area containing the selected video segments ready for review. Video retrieval in the Navigator Window shall be performed by: Selecting the Display Mode for required number of cameras. Selecting the device (recorder or workstation) that video was previously stored on or archived to. Selecting the cameras and microphones to be played back. By "Drag-and-Drop", similar to the live view, selected cameras and microphones are inserted into the multiscreen displays so that an operator can view a mix of previously recorded cameras and live video on the same screen. The timeline shall provide a graphical interface depicting color-coded bars that indicate video previously recorded as well as all alarmed video and audio. Any recorders on the network shall be capable of playing back, by utilizing the multiscreen displays, a mix of videos previously recorded on any other server on the network, or archived. The Navigator Window shall offer the ability to playback cameras: One by one. Page 14 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
Time synchronized (precise timeline the cameras were recorded in). Access to programming and more advanced screens shall be done by means of an immobile, permanently docked toolbar located on the top live screen. The Toolbar shall provide access to the following major functionality of the system: The Scheduler/Macro. Reports. Setup. Logout and Shutdown buttons. The software shall provide an advanced method for creating and executing extensive software commands. This shall be achieved by the use of macros. Macro configuration shall be defined for recorded cameras and microphones, command duration, recording location, local viewing, device ID, picture quality, refresh mode, recording rate (fps), related devices (sensors) and alarm activation. Macros shall allow an authorized user to create and schedule software commands that shall include but are not limited to: Sequencing cameras, including multiscreen displays, in a local and remote recorder. Execute remote macros existing on recorders currently connected to the network. Record cameras at different qualities and frame rates from any recorder on the network. Send alarm condition to any recorder and workstation on the network. By the use of macros, an authorized user shall be able to program the destination component of the alarm condition. An authorized user shall be able to program and execute macros remotely without the need to be physically located at the recorder that the macros will be programmed on. The Schedule/Macro button, shall allow the running of preconfigured combinations of camera, sensor and PTZ programmed routines. Macro scheduling shall include but is not limited to: Days of the week when a macro is active. Start and end time for when a macro is active. If a macro is to run continuously or not. A macro shall be able to run every: 5 min, 10 min, 1/4 Hour, 1/2 Hour, 3/4 Hour, 1 Hour, 2 Hours, 3 Hours, 4 Hours, 6 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours. A macro shall be able to be scheduled to run for 1-256 cycles. The network and sites configuration shall allow: Page 15 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
Setup of a system Nucleus and Backup Nucleus. The Backup Nucleus shall act as the hot-standby Nucleus in the event that the primary Nucleus goes offline, providing uninterrupted system functionality. A Network Settings menu shall provide a comprehensive worksheet for each networked device. When all units have been setup, the resulting connected devices shall define the site. Time synchronization of all components on the network. All appropriate networking features including, each server IP, Subnet and Gateway. Device configuration shall have the ability to be configured for system recognition and operation. Valid devices shall be: Cameras; fixed or with integrated PTZ. Microphones. Sensors. All devices shall be assigned a unique ID number and title descriptor. PTZ cameras shall be setup for RS-422 protocol and supported with existing manufacturer's drivers where applicable. Storage Database Utilities shall allow setup and usage of detected hard disks locally. Any networked recorder, workstation or server shall be a candidate to add to the picture database. Once established, any recorder shall use established hard disks for recording data. Authentication shall be configured using the Authentication Settings screen. Authentication display shall be configured by site and affect the destination video. A check box shall be available to enable video authentication and view the status of the video generated. The video authentication scheme shall utilize a 128 bit MD5 algorithm. The software shall be installed on an appropriate workstation computer running a Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system. When installed and run, the application shall display a Main Window and Login Window, where all configuration and operation begins. The login window shall consist of a User Name and Password field. Configuration of the system shall include setup of: Remote cameras and alarm names. Users and Groups. Data storage allocation. Macro programming. Scheduling, display and alarm notification. Remote pre/post alarm recording. Backup utility for setup configuration. The software shall be provided on CD format in a suitable case. 1.8
Digital Video Recording and Network Workstation
Page 16 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 16 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM
The Workstation shall be a state-of-the-art PC computer running Windows XP Professional. It shall be fully equipped with the Digital Video Recording and Network Software. The Workstation shall require an external monitor for operation. The Workstation shall have an ATX platform motherboard and 300 watt power supply using an Intel® 3.5 GHz processor. It shall have 6 GB of RAM memory, a 750 GB hard drive, a 100 Mbps PCI-type LAN Card, a Video Display Adapter using an nVidia® GeForce FX5200™ GPU with 2 GB of RAM memory and additional case fan cooling. The Workstation shall be equipped with a PS-2 wheel mouse and 101-key keyboard. The workstation shall be with latest specification existing in the market at the time of installation. The Workstation shall be housed in a mid-height tower case with all suitable connectors available on the back panel. It shall be constructed of steel and plastic materials in a beige-color exterior. It shall also be operated indoors in a temperature range not to exceed 32 to 104° F (0 to 40° C) and a humidity range not to exceed 0 to 95% relative, in a non-condensing atmosphere. The Workstation shall employ a Universal Voltage Power Supply requiring 105 - 240 VAC @ 50 - 60 Hz. Recorders shall be provided to store videos for a period of 30 days. 1.9
Control Console Provide appropriate control console for CCTV ,Access Control System, etc. at the Control room. The custom build control desk shall have enough number of 19", 21" & 42" cubicles. Size and type shall be as per the requirements of providing monitors and control equipment for all the ELV system as specified and as shown on the related drawings. It shall be to the approval of CLIENT.
Page 17 of 17
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 17 VOICE / DATA SYSTEM
SECTION 17 VOICE / DATA SYSTEM
Page 1 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 17 VOICE / DATA SYSTEM
SECTION 17 VOICE / DATA SYSTEM
INDEX
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
3.0
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
4.0
19” IDT / MDT / FO – CD CABINET
5.0
INSTALLATION
6.0
TESTING
7.0
DOCUMENTATION
8.0
WARRANTY
Page 2 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
2.0
PART B -SECTION 17 VOICE / DATA SYSTEM
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.
The proposed solution must be the latest available technology for the structured cabling system.
2.
The contractor shall install complete end-to-end Class E(00) system solution as detailed in the following sections.
3.
The proposed solution of Class E(00) must be provided with a minimum of 15 years performance warranty for the full bandwidth.
4.
Wherever the standards (EIA/TIA, Cenelec, ISO) are not ratified, the latest "Draft" shall be referred.
5.
All components pertaining to structured cabling system shall be manufactured by the DOHMS approved manufacturers, IBM and components from other manufacturers shall not be accepted.
6.
Installation shall meet ETISALAT requirements. Contractor to obtain approval on drawings from ETISALAT.
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION 1.
The voice panels installed in the IDT / MDT should have RJ45 interface and shall be installed in industry standard 19" cabinet as indicated in the drawings.
2.
Each area shall have its own IDT. The IDT shall constitute of RJ45 Patch Panel housed in industry standard 19" cabinet ( 800 x 800).
3.
The Multi-Pair cables shall be terminated on RJ45 termination panels (also housed in the 19" cabinet), whereby individual pairs can be accessed.
4.
The horizontal cables shall be terminated on Screened RJ45 Patch Panels on the IDT end and the other end of the cables shall be terminated with single shielded RJ45 or dual shielded RJ45 outlet based on the drawings.
5.
The contractor shall also supply patch cords and line cords to complete the endto-end Class E(00) system.
6.
The Data MDT (FO Campus Distributor) shall also be installed in industry standard 19" cabinet.
7.
Fiber Optic cable constituting of 12 Core MM shall be installed between the IDF for data backbone application, as indicated in the drawings.
8.
The FO cables shall be field terminated with SC connectors in cabinet mounted FO patch panels. Page 3 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
3.0
PART B -SECTION 17 VOICE / DATA SYSTEM
9.
At least one duplex SC-SC patch cords shall be supplied in each IDT, and equal number in the Data MDT.
10.
The main IT room or MDF room shall be called MTR (Main Telecom Room).
11.
IDF rooms shall be called FTR (Floor Telecom Room).
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS: Horizontal Cable: The horizontal cable shall constitute of four (4) individually screened Twisted Pair (SSTP), AWG23. The outer sheath shall be LSOH and the cable shall be specified up to 250MHz or better and should have the following values or better for Attenuation and NEXT: Frequency (MHz) 1 4 10 16 20 31.2 62.5 100 155 200 250
Attenuation (dB) 2.0 3.6 5.7 7.2 8.1 10.2 14.7 18.9 24.0 27.0 31.4
NEXT (dB) 90 88 85 84 83 82 81 79 78 78 77
•
The horizontal cabling shall be star-wired.
•
The maximum horizontal distance shall be 90Mtr. between the outlet and the patch panel (excluding patch cords and line cords).
•
The horizontal cabling shall be free of taps and bridges.
•
One cable shall be strictly used for one application, cable sharing will not be acceptable.
Connecting Hardware for Horizontal Cable: Connecting hardware shall be based on shielded RJ45 interface. The hardware shall feature excellent transmission performance and mechanical strength. Integral wire management and cable strain relief shall be integrated into the hardware. It should be possible to use the same RJ45 interface module at the outlet end as well as the patch panel (IDT) end. Termination of the cables on the hardware shall be accomplished without the use of any tools i.e. tools free installation. The termination at the patch panel end should cater to grounding of the panels using separate earthing facilities. The patch panels should consist of earthing kits to enable this grounding of shielded cabling. Page 4 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 17 VOICE / DATA SYSTEM
Wherever single RJ45 outlet is used, it should be possible to easily upgrade to dual RJ45, without any major changes to the faceplate. The Screened RJ45 will have the following specification:-
Comply with the latest standard proposals of ISO/IEC and requirements.
EIA/TIA for Cat 6
-
Compatible with Category 6 Generic standard plugs.
-
Tool-free connection technique (IDC) for data cables with AWG 23-26 wire diameter.
-
Allows opto-mechanical control of the connection technique.
-
Error-free connection according to EIA/TIA 568A/B/C without pair crossover.
-
Patented shield contacting with integrated cable strain relief.
-
Halogen-free material.
-
SGS, UL, CSA certified.
Application: -
Draft IEC 60603-7-4: Unshielded 8-Way Connectors for Frequencies up to 250 MHz; April 2000
-
DRAFT ISO/IEC 11801 SECOND EDITIONS: ISO/IEC JTC 1/SC 25/WG3 N598S; 200005-08
-
Draft EN 50173 second editions: CLC TC 215 WG1S 2/20; April 2000
Flame retardance : In accordance with UL 94 V0 Rating
Mechanical, Electrical and Transmission Data (measured at 20°C): Mechanical Data Material Polycarbonate, (UL 94 V- ) Mating cycles > 750 Wire diameter 0,4 mm (AWG 26) – 0,57 mm (AWG 23) Insulation diameter 0,8 – 1,6 mm Wire strain relief Through labyrinth in IDC block Cable strain relief Through cable ties For shielded RJ45 Shield contacting Large surface contact springs (on plug) Page 5 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 17 VOICE / DATA SYSTEM
Shield contacting Shield lance (on cable) Earthing terminals for flat plugs 4.8 x 0.5 mm Shield material CuSn, tin-plated, 2 – 4 µm Electric and Transmission Data Contact resistance < 50 milli Ohm (conductor – conductor) Contact resistance 1< 20 milli Ohm (shield – shield) Insulation resistance > 500 mega Ohm (500 VDC) Dielectric strength 1000 Veff, 50 Hz/1 min (conductor – conductor) Dielectric strength 11500 Veff, 50 Hz/1 min (conductor – shield) Coupling resistance IEC 96-1 1 MHz < 15 milliohm Frequency Attenuation 10 MHz < 100 milliohm [MHz] [dB] [dB] Limit Typ 0.02 <0.013 4 0.04 <0.015 10 0.06 <0.019 20 0.09 <0.024 31.25 0.11 <0.018 62.5 0.16 <0.023 100 0.20 <0.050 125 0.22 <0.062 155.52 0.25 <0.074 175 0.26 <0.085 200 0.28 <0.100 250 0.32 <0.170
NEXT [dB] Limit 80.0 80.0 74.0 68.0 64.1 58.1 54.0 52.1 50.2 49.1 48.0 46.0
[dB] Typ >96.84 >85.25 >77.25 >71.36 >67.82 >61.63 >58.76 >58.55 >57.77 >56.12 >50.10 >48.39
FEXT [dB] Limit 75.0 71.05 63.1 57.1 53.2 47.2 43.1 41.2 39.3 38.2 37.1 35.1
[dB] Typ >83.7 >73.7 >66.0 >60.2 >56.4 >50.5 >46.3 >44.1 >42.4 >41.6 >40.7 >39.2
RL [dB] Limit 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 28.1 24.0 22.1 20.2 19.1 18.0 16.0
[dB] Typ >45 >45 >43 >38.5 >36 >30 >27 >25 >23 >22 >21.5 >19
RJ45 Hardware Electrical Characterization, Transmission performances: Worst Pair Combination with a Cat.6 Plug
Patch Cords & Line Cords: The patch cords and line cords shall constitute of two modular RJ45 plugs assembled on shielded twisted pair stranded cable. The SSTP stranded cable shall be constructed using flexible cable . The sum length of all patch cords & line cords for one outlet shall not exceed 10Mtr. Under no circumstances shall locally assembled patch cords and line cords will be acceptable, all must be factory made. Connecting Hardware for Voice Backbone Cable: The voice backbone cables shall be terminated on high density 50 port RJ45 patch panels, which shall be housed in the 19" IDT cabinet. These panels shall accept UTP cables having AWG22-26 solid or stranded wire. Highly visible, colour coded strips shall be used to identify individual pair of the backbone cable. These panels shall have features like gas-tight connection, integral strain relief mechanism. Data Backbone Cable: Page 6 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 17 VOICE / DATA SYSTEM
The backbone cable for data applications shall comprise of fiber optic cables. The cables shall have minimum 8 or 12 cores of Multimode 50 /125 graded index fiber strands. The fiber optic cables shall have the following characteristics: Wavelength (nm)
Max. Attenuation (dB)
850 1300
<2.5 <0.7
Bandwidth (MHz x Km) >400 >1200
If the backbone distance exceeds 550Mtr, single mode fiber cables shall be installed. These cables when installed, shall have the following characteristics: Wavelength (nm)
Max. Attenuation (dB)
1300 1550
0.4 0.2
Bandwidth (GHz x Km) 100 100
The fiber optic cable shall be tight buffered, indoor type, LSOH when used within the building and outdoor type, rodent protected when used to connect between the buildings. The fiber optic cable shall be installed with a bending radius > 15 times the outer diameter of the cable.
Connecting Hardware for Data Backbone Cable: The fiber optic (data backbone) cable shall be field terminated with ST connectors (with ceramic ferrule) on each fiber strand. These connectors shall be installed in fiber optic patch panel, mounted in 19" IDT cabinet. These shall feature sliding drawer type panels for better administration of the fiber cables. The panels shall have holes at the rear for inserting and strain-relieving cables with PG glands. Cable and fiber guides for buffer management within the panels shall be built-in the panel. The insertion loss on each SC connectors shall be < 0.2dB. Fiber Optic Patch Cords: Fiber optic patch cords need to be provided to enable rapid connection and disconnection repeatedly on a non-destructive basis. Fiber optic patch cords shall be supplied with each IDT. The sum total quantity of IDTs shall be supplied at the data MDT (SC-SC). The patch cords shall be Multimode Graded Index duplex 50 /125 with SC connectors on one end and the other end will have connectors to suit the network equipment (SC). Provide for Single mode patch cords, wherever necessary. The patch cords shall have a mating cycle of 1000 and maximum tensile load on the cable of 100N. Under no circumstances shall locally assembled patch cords and line cords will be acceptable, all must be factory made. 4.0
19" IDT/MDT/FO-CD CABINET The cabinet shall provide a controlled environment to house telecommunications equipment, connecting hardware and to terminate the entire horizontal cabling, voice Page 7 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B -SECTION 17 VOICE / DATA SYSTEM
backbone cabling and data backbone cabling. These cabinets shall be of high quality and include locking doors. The cabinet shall be either wall mounted (with access from back and front – Swing type frame) or freestanding (with wheels) depending on the size of the cabinet. The wall mount cabinet should have a minimum depth of 500mm and the freestanding cabinet shall have a minimum depth of 800mm. Provide sufficient space in the cabinet for telecommunications/network equipment and future expansion. At IDTs where data backbone is not installed, allow sufficient space in the cabinet for installing data backbone in the future. Wherever data backbone is installed, the IDT cabinet shall be supplied with Fan Tray and UK type powerstrip. These cabinets shall be supplied with sufficient quantities of cable organisers for management/dressing of patch cords. 5.0
6.0
7.0
INSTALLATION 1.
The contractor shall not engage any sub-contractor to carry out the structured cabling work.
2.
The installation shall comply with the requirements of ISO-11801 Class E as appropriate.
3.
The structured cabling system (cables, RJ45 outlets, panels etc) shall be labeled in accordance with EIA/TIA-606.
TESTING 1.
The contractor shall test and demonstrate on site, to the satisfaction of the engineer, that the wiring is in full compliance with specific requirements of a Class E installation (250MHz). All the tests shall be carried out in accordance with TSB-67 standard.
2.
The contractor shall provide test results (both hard copy and soft copy) for every data and every voice outlet.
DOCUMENTATION 1.
8.0
The contractor shall submit a set of documentation comprising of layouts showing cable route & position of all outlets, labeling scheme, layout of cabinets and test results.
WARRANTY 1.
The OEM through the specialist contractor shall provide 15 years component and system performance warranty.
Page 8 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 18 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
SECTION 18 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
Page 1 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 18 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
SECTION 18
CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
INDEX
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.0
BATTERIES
4.0
CENTRAL MONITORING DEVICE
5.0
EXIT AND SAFETY LUMINAIRE
6.0
HIGH FREQUENCY ELECTRONIC CONTROLGEAR
7.0
MAIN BATTERY PANEL AND SUBSTATION PANELS
8.0
AUTOMATIC MONITORING AND LOGGING FACILITY
9.0
BMS INTERFACE
10.0
WIRING
Page 2 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B - SECTION 18 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
GENERAL The emergency lighting system & all its components shall be designed & installed to meet the local civil defense requirements & the respective DIN/VDE 0108 & BS5266 standards applicable to this project. Emergency lighting shall fulfill the following functions, Illuminate the escape routes Indicate the escape route direction clearly Provide the Exit signs on all the Exits Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment & other life saving equipment on the premises are properly illuminated. Permit operations concerned with safety measures & to shut down hazardous processes. All products used in the emergency lighting system shall be manufactured by an ISO9001 certified company, complying with the relevant VDE/DIN/BS/EN standards & shall bear the CE certification for Electro-Magnetic compatibility. The number of central battery panels shall be appropriately decided for maximum reliability to ensure continued emergency supply & on large buildings failure of one panel shall not result in total emergency lighting supply failure for the entire building.
2.0
Central Battery System Description
2.1
Mechanical Construction The battery housing shall be sheet steel, powder coated housing IP32 with removable screwed front, rear & top doors to provide complete access to the batteries. The electronics section shall have IP54 sheet steel enclosure with transparent polycarbonate window for all central systems & IP54 sheet steel enclosure with full metal door for all substations. The electronic compartment shall have large cabling compartments with cable entries from top via four or more undrilled removable metal flange plates. All incoming cables & looping circuits shall be connected on protected & fused terminals as per ENVDE0100. All outgoing luminaire circuits shall be connected direct to relevant components via plug-in type terminals 2.5 sq. mm. The electronic components shall have 19” slide in technology for installation and maintenance.
2.2
Electrical Construction The system shall be built up in a modular format with all modules being plug-in-type design. The outgoing circuits shall be fed through changeover modules. One module shall be used for each separate switchable outgoing circuits with maximum load of 6Amps as per DIN/VDE 0108, if circuits are 2 Amps & below, one module with two separately switchable outgoing circuits shall be used . Each circuit shall be protected within the system on mains & battery side via screw-in type cartridge fuses on each module. The fuses shall be accessible via front plate of the module. The mains supply & battery mains cables shall be protected by knife edge fuses. The fuse holders shall have handles for simple removal of the fuses.
Page 3 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 18 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
Each panel shall have a spare fuse carrier with atleast three spare fuses for each size used in respective panel. 2.3
Control Module The control module shall be fully encapsulated plug-in type, composed of a microprocessor control module with plain text display with multiple line display of operative states & luminaire failures. LED,s shall indicate, -
Mains operation
-
Mains failure
-
Battery operation
-
Summation fault
Potential free indicator contacts for, -
Operation
-
Battery operation
-
Summation fault
Centronic interface for the connection of standard printers shall be provided on the front of the control module A electronically controlled 24V output for the voltage monitoring of lighting sub distribution panels shall be provided. Electronically isolated mains monitoring for maintained & non maintained light circuits with forced changeover in case of mains failure from mains to emergency light operation. As a standard following programming modes shall be available, -
Manual reset
-
Time delay of mains return
-
Stair well light timer adjustable from 1 to 15 minutes
-
Acoustic alarm in case of mains failure, manual reset or summation fault
Individual changeover per emergency circuit with free programming for maintained or non maintained light & two pole fusing confronting to VDE. Failure recognition for each individual safety / Exit luminaire in conjunction with proprietary electronic ballasts including 2 wire monitoring module without additional data line. Page 4 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
2.4
PART B - SECTION 18 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
Changeover Module Each changeover module shall be fully encapsulated plug-in type, freely programmable to suit type of luminaires connected on outgoing circuits i.e. maintained, non maintained or switch maintained. The individual lamp monitoring circuits shall be included in the changeover module. Each changeover module shall have LED indications for Circuit On & Lamp failure & shall be fit to monitor upto 12 luminaires maximum as required by DIN/VDE0108/pr EN50171. All outgoing circuit terminals shall be provided to monitor the sub distribution boards.
2.5
Maintained Light Switch Sensing Module For mains operation common switching of general lighting & safety lighting by means of existing light switches a compact fully encapsulated module shall be provided near each luminaire circuit to be switched with each of these reflecting one lighting switch. These modules shall also serve as a sub circuit monitoring module, whereby end circuits are monitored for any power failure in that area.
2.6
Circuit Monitoring Module Each lighting DB or rack feeding light circuits in all areas shall be provided with voltage monitoring modules for mains failure so that supply voltage can be automatically transferred from normal to battery supply mode. In corridors, lift lobbies and entrances, the respective lighting circuits shall be provided with sub-circuit monitoring modules for detection of the particular circuit and automatically switching-on the emergency lights in that area.
2.7
Charger Charger module shall be fully encapsulated plug-in type, micro processor controlled module with temperature controlled voltage charging to IU characteristics. Automatic boost charging facility shall be built in to the system depending on the required total battery capacity. It shall have charging & supervising method for failure indication of battery circuits as well as battery charger. The charger shall be designed for a 90% recharge of a fully discharged battery set within 20 hours. It shall come complete with earth leakage monitor for battery circuit monitoring. It shall be provided with LED indications for, -
Operation
-
Charger On
-
Booster On
-
Mains Operation
-
Battery capacity > 10%, >50%, 100%
-
Charging Failure
-
Insulation fault
It shall have potential free indicator contacts for, Page 5 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
-
Charging failure
-
Fast charge
-
Insulation fault
PART B - SECTION 18 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
It shall have a push button to simulate earth leakage failures. It shall include plug-in-type terminals as well as the protection fuses for mains & battery accessible via the front plate of the charger 3.0
Batteries Batteries shall be maintenance free, sealed leak proof 220V lead acid gas recombination type battery with following system features,
4.0
-
Life time expectation > 10 years @ 24ºC ambient – temperature as per DIN VDE 0558, Part 508.
-
extremely low gas generation, requiring no special ventilation
-
acid density between 1.24kg/L & 1.26kg / L
-
service life of ten years
-
low self discharge
-
IP 32 battery cabinet with ventilation openings and IP 54 electronic cabinet.
-
maintenance free special connectors with pole covers meeting the rules of prevention of the accidents
-
pole ducts tight to electrolyte & atmospheric oxygen
-
absolutely maintenance free over the whole service life
-
Immobilized electrolyte design
-
permanently sealed pressure release safety vent
-
Operates at extremely low internal pressure
Central Monitoring The Central monitoring shall be through BMS and the BMS PC. It shall have programming / automatic testing facility for time duration test, luminaire display function test, location of luminaire, manual reset & acoustic alarm
5.0
EXIT & Safety luminaire Unless otherwise stated all EXIT luminaires shall be operated via an EMERGENCY CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM (ECBS). Page 6 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 18 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
All Exit luminaires shall have pictogram legends as per DIN 4844/CEN TC 169 or markings as per local civil defence requirements with viewing distance of 36 meters or 16 meters based on the length of the corridor. The luminaire shall be built according to EN 60598. Safety luminaires shall be operated by an EMERGENCY CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM. This shall be achieved by using high frequency electronic ballasts operating at full load or by the use of halogen lamp luminaires. These ballast shall be fitted on the part of normal lighting designated as emergency lighting. All Exit and safety luminaires shall have a monitoring component with easy accessible addressing module. All luminaires with high frequency ballasts shall have a built in or separate monitoring facility. Outside of every installed exit and safety luminaire a label (Red/White) with the circuit and luminaire reference number shall be installed. 5.1
Slave Emergency Luminaire (Suitable for connection across central battery system) All luminaries shall meet following requirements : Supply voltage 220V/230V AC/DC The luminaire shall comply the requirements of EN60598 Electronic ballast shall comply the requirements of EN60298/60294 EMC or EMI protection to EN55015 Ambient Temperature - 40ºC.
5.1.1
Type – EL – 1 (Areas without False Ceiling) Luminaire shall be non maintained type slave luminaire with 8 watt fluorescent lamp with addressable low loss electronic ballast which can communicate with central control module. Luminaire housing shall be white plastic. Luminaire shall be wall / ceiling / pendant mounted to suit site conditions. Protection class I, IP 65
5.1.2
Type – EL – 2 (False Ceiling areas)
5.2
1 x 8W fully recessed Emergency luminaire. Housing shall be sheet steel white with electronic ballast and communication module. Slave Exit luminaire (suitable for connection across central battery system)
5.2.1
Type – Exit – 1 (Areas without False Ceiling) Maintained 8w luminaire, wall / ceiling / pendant mounted with addressable low loss electronic ballast which can communicate with the panel. Protection : IP-65 Minimum viewing distance 30 meters The diffuser shall have EXIT Legend with running man and directional arrow on one or both sides as required at the location of installation. Housing shall be white plastic and diffuser.
5.2.2
Type – Exit – 2 (Areas with False Ceiling) Page 7 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 18 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
Exit light type shall be exclusive edge light with acrylic glass panel. The housing shall be slim aluminium housing with snap on facility panels. It shall have 8W fluorescent lamp and addressable electronic ballast 6.0
High Frequency Electronic Control Gear All safety and exit luminaires shall be built according to EN 60598; electronic ballast to EN 60298/60294 and EN 60924/60925, EMC protection to EN 55015. The electronic ballast with monitoring facility and easy accessible address module shall have an automatic cut-out fuse for failures within the lamp circuit.
7.0
Main Central Battery Panel & Sub Station Panels The substations shall be installed in areas with a maximum room temperature of 30 deg.C. The substations shall be located based on the requirements of the lighting loads and optimising the field wiring. All substations shall be connected to the central station for central group monitoring.
8.0
Automatic & Cyclic Function Monitoring & Logging Facility An automatic monitoring and testing facility shall be installed with permanent cyclic charger and battery monitor at intervals of five minutes or less with daily/weekly function test of the complete load supplied from the battery, charger, wiring, luminaires, registration and logging of tests and results. A manually operated test feature shall also be provided in addition to the automatically operated testing feature.
9.0
BMS Interface The CBS shall be integrated on LON works Protocol to BMS. Refer BMS specification for the details regarding integration. The proposed system shall provide full integration including luminaire status after each test. Display shall be available on BMS workstation. Systems which cannot comply with the above will not be acceptable. The Central Battery system Vendor shall provide LON interface module for data transfer to BMS.
10.0
Wiring Wiring, both power and control, between the central battery, substation panels and luminaires shall be carried out in fire retardant Pirelli FP200 or equivalent cable of suitable size as per the local civil defence requirements. 3 core fire resistant cables with earth wire shall be provided to feed substations from central battery panel. Cable size selection details shall be submitted based on the electrical load of each substation. Emergency lights in each staircase shall be wired in separate circuits to comply with Civil Defence requirements.
Page 8 of 8
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 19 NURSE CALL SYSTEM
SECTION 19 NURSE CALL SYSTEM
Page 1 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 19 NURSE CALL SYSTEM
SECTION 19
NURSE CALL SYSTEM
INDEX
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
SYSTEM
3.0
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT INTERFACING
4.0
SAFETY
5.0
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Page 2 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B - SECTION 19 NURSE CALL SYSTEM
GENERAL Computerized Nurse Call Systems shall be manufactured to fulfill the present valid standards and regulations for light signaling technology (ALT) DIN 41050 (part 1 and 2), HTM 2015 (BS & EN Standards). For the installations of light signaling, the regulations DIN VDE 0834 and the standards that are quoted shall be observed. Furthermore the standards DIN 41050 part 1 and 2 as well as HTM 2015 shall be taken into consideration during the planning. The systems shall incorporate the latest technology and shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001 environment.
2.0
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.1
Male and Female Wards The computerized systems shall incorporate logic circuits to enable room data and time information to be processed. With the nurse call systems it shall be possible to handle up to 64 zones, which can be each divided into 6 logical sub-zones. This division shall be achieved by software. The maximum number of all logical and physical zones shall be limited to 240. For each physical zone up to maximum of 50 patient rooms shall only be allowed. Furthermore the system allows flexibility to adapt the allocation of room numbers according to individual needs. System characteristics The nurse call system shall be designed for quick and easy installation. The software shall allow individual flexibility, adapting to any changes in the application. For example patient room numbers shall be quickly changed and allocated during or after installation. Call and presences shall be displayed at the operating station, in corridors, in duty rooms and patient rooms. With the speech option, the call shall be answered from any one of this points. Operating the presence push button shall result in: cancellation of the call within the room, activation of the call transfer and preparation of an emergency call. Existing calls from other rooms shall be transferred to this room. Systems with a speech facility shall allow communication from room to room or between duty room and the patient. Speech facility shall be available from every bed. The computerized nurse call system shall be operated in a centralized, decentralized or combined mode, according to the requirements. The system shall use a single six cores cable for power supply, speech and data lines.
System structure The computerized nurse call system shall consist of 3 components: Page 3 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 19 NURSE CALL SYSTEM
The operating computer (PC), The nurse call control unit (NCS), The room equipment with individual hand set consisting of Nurse call & speech function at every bed. The operating computer and the nurse call control units shall be independently functional. Operating Computer The operating computer shall be used as a display unit for the information of the nurse call control unit (NCS). When used with a communication unit and in connection with a speech facility, the operating computer shall enable general address calls and direct calls to rooms and beds to take place. Calls on the system and staff presences shall be displayed in tabular form. Data specific to each patient shall be entered into an internal data memory. These data shall be displayed on the screen of the operating computer whenever that patient calls. Nurse Call Control Unit (NCS) The nurse call control unit shall be the main control unit. It shall be built as a multiprocessor unit and shall comprise of a microprocessor, and audio adapter card and a communication processor unit. Additional control cards shall be added according to requirements. The control programs and configuration data of the nurse call system shall be loaded via the operating computer. Room equipment Information on the nurse call systems shall be received in rooms using different types of system units. For example room terminals with displays shall show calls in order of priority. Remind calls and presences shall be displayed continuously if there are no normal, emergency or enhanced calls. The connection board for room terminals and the electronic module shall be used as a room distribution point and shall allow easy wiring to patient call equipment. It shall be possible to substitute operating equipment without speech facility. For example call push buttons or pear and multiple push buttons. In the case of nurse call systems with speech, facility communication handsets shall be possible to be installed. These handsets in addition to the call functions shall allow the control of radio and lighting and provide a means of private two-way conversation. Units shall be capable of providing integrated telephone functions. The nurse stations and duty rooms shall be equipped with master stations. These shall provide a means to set a presence indication as well as allowing zone linking. In addition the systems shall provide speech facility, general address calls and direct speech to beds or rooms as appropriate.
Page 4 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 19 NURSE CALL SYSTEM
In corridors, calls shall be indicated in clear text on information displays or outside the room by the corridor lamp. Following types of calls shall be indicated: Type of call
As per DIN 41050, Part 1
Visual signals
- Patient calls normal call
nurse call (abbr.: call)
permanent light - red -
bathroom/WC call
bathroom or WC call
permanent light white
enhanced bathroom/WC call
enhanced call
- Staff calls: emergency call
nurse call with emergency call
flashing light - red permanent light green -
doctor call
flashing light - white -, red - green
(no statement)
flashing light - white permanent light green -
- Further calls: diagnostic call
diagnostic call enhanced call
flashing light - red -
remind call
in memory switching
flashing light - red (slow blinking rhythm)
flashing light - white -
doctor call
bathroom/WC emergency call
Also, refer to hospital specialist room data sheet for actual requirement. In addition to the visual signals, acoustic signals shall also be sent to all rooms where presences are set. The nurse call system shall distinguish between two call categories. Normal and bathroom/WC calls shall belong to category 1. Doctor, emergency, diagnostic and priority calls as well as enhanced bathroom/WC calls and bathroom/WC emergency calls shall belong to category 2. In the case of acoustic call transfer, calls of categories 1 and 2, as well as doctor and telephone calls, shall be identified by different call intervals. 2.2
TRIAGE, RESUSCITATION, ACUTE TREATMENT, SHORT STAY WARDS, ICU, RECOVERY & ALL TYPE OF OPERATION THEATRES The nurse call system for these wards shall be able to handle up to 16 physical zones (Zone controllers / Main control units), which can be each subdivided into 3 logical groups. The system shall be able to control up to 127 patient rooms via a corridor data-bus for each zone controller (main control unit). Call and presences shall be displayed in the duty room. By activating a presence push button, the call from the concerned room shall be cancelled, the call transfer shall be Page 5 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 19 NURSE CALL SYSTEM
activated and the emergency call shall be prepared. The system shall have the follow me facility. (Calls from other rooms should be forwarded and audibly indicated to rooms where presence is set. The system shall be flexible to adapt the room numbers and the call names according to the hospital needs and recommendations. In corridors, calls shall be visually indicated by corridor lamps and information displays that can be wall or ceiling mounted. Following type of calls shall be indicated: Call Type Patient calls Normal call Bathroom/WC call Enhanced bathroom/WC call Staff calls Emergency call Bathroom emergency call Doctor call Other call types Remind call
Optical signals Permanent red light Permanent white light Flashing White light
Flashing red light and permanent green light Flashing white light and permanent green light Sequential flashing white, red then green light s Flashing red light blinking) Flashing red light
Diagnostic call
(slow
Nurse Station: The nurse station shall have the following functions: -
Call and status identification with following indicators: patient room, bed, normal call, bathroom/WC call, emergency call, bathroom/WC emergency call, doctor call, answered call in remind function, presence, fault, following calls.
-
Call activation (call button).
-
Cancel and presence button.
-
Call reminder.
-
Free selection of zone linking from a special module.
-
Simultaneous display of several calls and presence’s.
-
Can be upgraded to have speech and public addressing with no major changing in the system wiring.
Patient handset (multiple push button) functions: -
Nurse call release Page 6 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 19 NURSE CALL SYSTEM
-
Auto-release unbreakable plug system with 2 m cord length.
-
Automatic call release as a plug call when plug ejected from the auto release plug system
-
Easily repaired and changed if required.
-
2 light control buttons.
General Equipment: The system shall include at least but not only the following main equipment which can be upgraded at any time without any major changes: 1.
Main control unit (Zone controller).
2.
Data bus terminator unit.
3.
System cabling.
4.
Power supply (24 V - DC).
5.
Electrical safety components.
Scope of work: 1. The main control unit shall support the following: All types of patient and staff call including: normal call, bathroom/WC call, priority call, enhanced bathroom call, emergency call, doctor call and bathroom emergency call. Different optical signals for each type of call (different colours and colour sequences). Different audio signals for all type of calls (different frequencies). Can be upgraded to support interface with the following: -
Computer.
-
Printer.
-
Paging system.
2.
The system cabling shall be 4 twisted pairs telephone cable in addition to one pair 1.5 – 2 mm2 for power distribution in the corridor data bus.
3.
The power supply of the system shall be 24V self-regulated.
4.
Safety features like emergency mode and short circuit protection shall be built-in the system. Page 7 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 19 NURSE CALL SYSTEM
Ward (Nurse station) equipment: The following equipment shall be available in the Nurse Station: 1.
LCD alphanumeric display (Display module unit) for displaying all ward information.
2.
LCD alphanumeric display (Duty Selection Unit) for selection a predefined link between wards.
3.
A reminder button for changing the normal call into a reminded call (with muted sound) for a certain predefined period of time.
4.
A bus connection socket can be added to the station to enable an easy upgrade to a master station unit with a power saving LCD touch screen and speech facility.
5.
It shall be possible to upgrade the system to have LED dot information display in the corridor to display all calls information without any modification in the system (only the cable connection to the display).
6.
All active components shall be checked for functionality via the main control unit automatically every 30 seconds.
Speech components may be added to the system at the nurse station when required to upgrade with no additional major modifications in the system. Room equipment: The following equipment shall be available in the patient rooms
Cancel and presence button: Equipped with a button, LED reassurance lamp and a buzzer. It shall be used to cancel the call and set presence of the nurse in the room. It shall be installed at the door entrance. When the nurse is present in the room, the buzzer shall indicate if there is any calls and their type from any other room in the ward. Nurse call module with socket: It shall be used for Normal call and Emergency call (when nurse is present). It shall be installed beside the bed or in the bed head unit. The socket shall be used to connect a multiple push button for the patient. This unit shall be active component unit having its own logical address. 1.
The over door light shall have a plastic base light grey RAL 7040, with white lamp cover having 3 sections with different colour lamps (white, red and green) to Page 8 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 19 NURSE CALL SYSTEM
identify the type of call / presence in the room. Patient hand sets with big red button having the nurse sign to enable the easy use as well as an unbreakable self-release plug system. There also shall be a reassurance LED behind the button to indicate if there is a generated call. 2.
All active components shall be checked for functionality via the main control unit automatically every 30 seconds. Pull cord (in the bathrooms): Splash proof with 2 m long red cord having a big red end with the nurse sign to enable the easy identification. Individual cancel button: This shall be used to cancel the bathroom calls independent from the main cancel/presence button in the room. Doctors/ Cardiac Call This is a special button for calling the Doctors. This call shall be used for emergencies. Over door light (Electronic module for patient rooms): The electronic module shall be the central control unit for the patient room. At the same time the electronic module shall be used as a corridor lamp. As active units, a display module, a speech module and up to eight call modules shall be connected via the bed data-bus. The active units shall be addressed with an eight-digit alphanumeric text. All electronic modules shall be equipped with call and cancel circuits for passive circuits.
3.0
4.0
The over door light shall have a plastic base light grey RAL 7040 surface mounted, with white lamp cover having 3 sections with different colour lamps (white, red and green) to identify the type of call / presence in the room. This unit shall be active component unit having its own logical address. EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT INTERFACING The nurse call systems shall be extended by adding equipment via the interface. For example, it shall be possible to connect the paging system to the nurse call system. Furthermore it is possible to connect internal messages, such as fire alarms or technical alarms via interface units. SAFETY The nurse call system shall be self-monitoring. Any malfunctions shall be selectively shown on each display terminal. In the case of a total failure of the nurse call control unit (PRZ) the system shall operate in an emergency mode and provide call functions, call cancel, presence indication and call transfer to rooms where presence has been set, in addition to the visual indication of the corridor and zone lamps. In case of power failure, calls shall remain stored until the power supply is connected again. An auto-release plug mounted onto a pear or multiple push buttons as well as on the patient terminal or patient handset shall allow a safe disconnection and thus avoid damage to the plug and socket units found in conventional arrangements. When a plug is inadvertently removed a "plug out" message shall be shown on the display units. Lamp outputs shall also be short circuit protected. Electrical safety and EMC requirements shall conform to appropriate EC directives. Page 9 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
5.0
PART B - SECTION 19 NURSE CALL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE The equipment shall be durable. Room equipment such as the room terminal and the electronic modules shall be possible to be replaced at any time, simply by plugging and unplugging, without interrupting the operation of the system. A diagnostic function shall allow the display of information regarding the actual operational condition of the system on screen of the operating computer. It shall be possible to connect a modem to the operating computer enabling remote diagnostics and the update of new systems software. This shall allow capability to diagnostic problems and enable software improvements.
Page 10 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 20 CENTRAL CLOCK SYSTEM
SECTION 20 CENTRAL CLOCK SYSTEM
Page 1 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 20 CENTRAL CLOCK SYSTEM
SECTION 20
CENTRAL CLOCK SYSTEM
INDEX
1.0
GENERAL
Page 2 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B - SECTION 20 CENTRAL CLOCK SYSTEM
GENERAL The Contractor shall allow for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of a Central clock system comprising of Time Control Center, TCXO modules chime modules, secondary clocks, power supply units and all necessary cabling and termination. The system shall be generally as indicated on the drawings and as herein specified, to the approval of the Engineer. The equipment shall be UL standard 863 and must be CSA certified. The contractor shall submit the material submittal strictly based on each and every clauses of the specification for strict quality assurance and performance of the system. Alternative proposal will not be accepted in whatsoever the reason, unless the alternative manufacturer comply the specification requirements of the system. Compliance statement shall be submitted with supporting design calculation and product literature and schematic diagrams for engineers approval. The equipment shall meet the following requirements.
1.1
Time Control Center The time control center shall provide accurate time keeping for control of secondary clocks such as Celestra, BCD data clocks, synchronous wire, power line carrier, and a minute impulse clocks . The Time control center shall have a programmable time and day of week referenced control of six output circuits. A liquid crystal display shows the time, day of week, and the status of the six output circuits. The display is also used for programming, editing and reviewing of stored programs. The state of the six output circuits is programmed by the user through a keypad or may also be controlled by six manual override switches. The user may program from one to four independent schedules within the Time Control Center. Changing between schedules is accomplished from the keyboard and may be done at any time. The display in its run mode shall indicate the time, day of week, circuit status, and what schedules have been selected. When the programming mode has been entered the display shall lead programming sequence by flashing what is to be selected. Responses to prompts are entered via the keyboard using either the “Yes” or “No” keys. The control switches shall have 3 position (on/auto/off) maintained switches. Manual “on/off” control shall override the programmed functions. The ”Auto” position provides programmed functions to occur. Complete manual control of secondary clocks shall be provided via Man/Auto/Off switches for synchronous wired and power line carrier systems with generator start. The Time Control center shall meet/have the following operational and functional requirements.
Page 3 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. 1.2
PART B - SECTION 20 CENTRAL CLOCK SYSTEM
Microprocessor based controller Controls synchronous Wired RS-232 interface for synchronization to WWV 6 local program control circuits 7day programming (seconds resolution) Automatic daylight saving time correction Manual override switches Interactive Programming Liquid crystal display (6 digits) All programmed times available to all circuits and schedules 4 program schedules 1000 program events AC line synchronous or DC Quartz time base 19” rack mountable Impulse clock control Coded Receiver Interface Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator - (TCXO) Must comply with UL standard 863
Programming Keypad The 12 segment shall be used to input all programming including setting of the time and date, daylight saving time changes, schedules changes, and selection of 12 or 24 hour display format. It shall be possible to secure the keyboard by an access code which shall prevent tampering or unauthorized program modifications. Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator The Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator (TCXO) shall be used to stabilize the power line frequency. The temperature compensated crystal module shall provide a source of frequency reference to the central controller. This module shall provide accuracy of + 3 seconds per month from 32 degree F to 122 degree F.
1.3
1.4
Receptacle Assembly The receptacle assembly shall be used to connect surface mounted clocks equipped with four position connectors. It shall be mounted on a stainless steel single gang plate that measures 2-3/4” wide by 4-1/4” high. Analog Clock Assemblies Standard Features: 400mm dia analog clock Anodized aluminum housing Black numbers on white background Single or double sizes, wall or ceiling mounting bracket 24V polarized 1/1 with pulses from master clock Protection IP44 DESCRIPTION The analog clocks provided shall have high visibility under a variety of ambient light conditions. The clock shall be round shape of 400mm diameter. Clocks shall also be connected to power line carrier/synchronous timing inputs that provide hourly and 12 hour corrections. A capacitor in each clock maintains timekeeping for approximately 12 hours in the event of power failure in the facility.
Page 4 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 21 PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
SECTION 21 PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
Page 1 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 21 PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
SECTION 21
PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
INDEX
1.0
GENERAL
Page 2 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B - SECTION 21 PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
GENERAL The Contractor shall allow for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of a Public Address system comprising of Amplifiers, Audio matrix units, loudspeakers, FM/AM tuner, Twin Cassette deck, CD player, Digital Voice Announcer, Multi-zone paging microphone and all necessary cabling and termination. The system shall be generally as indicated on the drawings and as herein specified, to the approval of the Engineer. The complete system shall be supplied by a specialist Subcontractor having at least 5 years experience in the field. All equipment supplied shall be from reputed manufacturers and shall be installed by the authorized representative of the manufacturer. In general, the main system shall allow making vocal announcements from different microphones as shown in the layout drawing, playing recorded message announcements and playing background music via a twin tape deck, a multi disc CD player and one AM/FM tuner. Selection of music for the public areas shall be from the amplifier rack itself. The system control console shall be located in the Security Office. It shall be possible to make announcement from any paging microphone to the corresponding areas or to any other zones required at the site. Audio matrix shall be used with appropriate wall mounted selector push buttons provided near to each microphones. It shall be possible to select any or all zones for paging from the microphones. The recorded message module shall be initiated manually by push buttons or automatically by potential free contacts from the Fire Alarm control panel. System shall be configured in such a way that when a paging to the area where local audio/visual system is introduced, paging from main system shall override local programme being conducted. For paging purposes the entire area shall be divided into 16 zones. Volt-free contacts corresponding to alarm conditions of each zone and roof shall be made available at the amplifier rack by the Fire Alarm system supplier. The digital storage module shall be capable of storing three different messages, ‘Alert, Evacuate and All Clear’ each of at least 18 seconds duration. It shall be possible to manually override an automatic announcement. Output of Audio matrix to the corresponding zone shall be through dedicated amplifiers for each zone. Common amplifiers for different zones will not be acceptable. Modular amplifiers as specified with all plugg-in input modules shall be provided for Central reception and integrated amplifier for other zones. The system shall be provided with 22 zones minimum to programme each zone as per the requirement of the user.
1.1
Amplifier Rack
Page 3 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 21 PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
The amplifiers and associated equipment shall be housed in a standard 19” rack with glass door. Ventilation panels shall be provided for proper air circulation and cooling. 1.2
Modular Amplifier Mainframe The amplifier shall be modular construction with preamplifiers pluggable onto a mainframe. Upto six preamplifiers could be added as required providing microphone input module, lineinput module, alarm tones, digital voice module, Chime module etc. Amplifiers with built in music sources input and mic input will not be accepted. Control over the total mainframe shall be achieved through audio monitoring combiners. The motherboard shall also be capable of accepting switch selectable preannouncement chimes. The power rating of the amplifiers shall be 75W, 150 watts or 300 watts depending on the loudspeaker load requirements. No amplifier shall be loaded more than 80% of its rated capacity. Slave amplifiers shall be used to meet additional power requirements. The amplifiers shall have the following technical characteristics. Output power Nominal RMS : Maximum RMS(100V) : Output Voltage Output Regulation Frequency Response Total harmonic distortion Output noise Sensitivity AC Input Operational temperature
1.3
120 W or 250W 135W or 300W : 100V : 1.25dB/1.5 dB 100Vline, 3 dB down : 60 Hz-20,000Hz : <0.4% : >85dB : 0dBm, 775mVolts : 220V,50Hz : -20 to 45 deg C
Microphone input Module The module shall be a basic general purpose low impedance balanced microphone input, with a selectable phantom power facility. In addition it can be configured to process ambient noise sensor signals when used in conjunction with level regulating combiner. It shall have the following specifications:
1.4
Sensitivity Input impedance
: :
200uV maximum. 350 Ohms @ 1kHz. Suitable for upto 200 Ohms microphone impedance.
Frequency response Signal/noise ratio Distortion
: : :
30Hz and 18kHz 150 Ohms source 55dB max. sensitivity, 150 Ohms source 0.1% at nominal output 1kHz, max. sensitivity
Balanced line input module Page 4 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 21 PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
The balanced line input module shall be a general purpose balanced 600 Ohminput, with a selectable phantom power facility for use with microphones having built-in preamplification. It can also be configured for inputs from 100V line source by switch selection. It shall have the following specifications:
1.5
Sensitivity
:
Input impedance Frequency response Signal/noise ratio Distortion
: : : :
150mV maximum, 100V minimum by internal switch selection 15k Ohms (300mV),100k Ohms (100V). 30Hz to 20kHz 65dB max. sensitivity, input terminated 0.1% at nominal output 1kHz, max. sensitivity
FM/AM Tuner The tuner shall be a modular Quartz-PLL synthesizer tuner with random presets for 30 FM/AM stations. It shall have a 4 letter station name memory and all 30 preset stations are automatically sampled in sequence for the user to decide a station to listen to. The tuner shall be connected to the system using balanced line input specified elsewhere in the specification. The tune shall be Pioneer or equal. Tuning Range Sensitivity Frequency response Signal to Noise Ratio T.H. Distortion Stereo Separation Power Consumption
1.6
: AM - 530-1700kHz VHF/FM - 87.5-108 Mhz : 31.2dBf (1.3uV, 75Ohms) : 30Hz –15,000Hz +/- 1 dB : (IHF) Mono/Stereo 76dB/73dB (at 85dBf) : 0.3% : 40 dB @ 1kHz. : 10W
Digital Voice Announcer Module The Audio Message Storage module shall be pluggable onto the mainframe and shall provide on site recording from microphone or tape for verbal warning, informative messages or a combination of the two allowing system operators to record and rerecord their own messages independently. Once recorded, the messages may be played back any number of times without degradation of the audio quality. The Solid State Audio Message Storage module shall be fitted in the amplifier mainframe front panel. The design uses digital audio conversion and storage of high quality audio announcements, each of up to 36 seconds in length. It shall be designed with internal battery backup facilities to ensure that the message data is retained when the power to the amplifier mainframe is removed. It shall also provide internally selectable message override functions. These enable alarm messages to be triggered remotely by external control line like from fire detection system.
Page 5 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 21 PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
The maximum number of messages can be stored in each module shall be 2. 2 Nos. such modules shall be included in the system for 3 messages. It shall have the following front panel controls: Rec/Play, Record/Preview, Step sequence (1-8) and shall have an audio bandwidth of 100Hz to 5.5kHz. On playback, external control lines(dry contacts from Fire Alarm Panel) enable messages to be triggered individually or in sequence by external equipment. 1.7
Integrated Amplifier The amplifier shall be rated 60W or 120 W suitable to drive the loudspeakers and shall have a 20% spare capacity. It shall be a full feature integrated amplifier with four universal inputs, front panel activity indicators and shall be rack mountable. It shall be possible to add slave amplifiers for additional power requirements. The amplifier shall have the following characteristics. Input Output regulation Distortion Frequency response Power rating
: : : : :
220/240V, 50Hz <2dB <0.1% 60Hz-18kHz 60W or 120W
The amplifiers shall support following basic requirement: Universal prioritized inputs Two note chime facility Music/Speech and speech only 100V/8Ohm output Phantom Power Alarm tone generator VOX and dual supply operation 1.8
Audio Matrix Mixer The matrix mixer shall be used to connect all the microphone and music sources inputs and to route the required input to a particular output. It shall provide 16 line level inputs and up to 16 line level outputs. All input and output connectors shall be Phoenix type connectors. Each 110 cross-point shall provide full user control of parameters including level, ramp time, and slew rate. Ramping and ducking of cross-point levels shall be under user control. All inputs shall be independently routable to any or all outputs. The gain adjustment of level at each cross-point shall be from 0dB to -100dB. The matrix shall be programmable through an RS232 port. The matrix shall be capable of routing paging inputs while automatically ducking background sources. The matrix shall be controllable through an external ReO device bus. The ReO bus shall be a synchronous 485 protocol capable of supporting up to 128 remotes in a system. Remotes shall be group-able into logical stations. ReO remote devices shall be both push-button and rotary knob devices capable of selecting audio sources and controlling audio volume levels. Outputs shall be groupable into logical zones. The matrix shall be operable either as a stand-alone device or in conjunction with computer control through an RS232 interface. The matrix shall be provided with a standard Windows® graphical user interface for setup and control. Page 6 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 21 PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
There shall be available an sixteen channel optional mic/line card to provide preamplification of input signals. This card shall provide four ranges of gain from 0dB to +60dB. The gain range shall be automatically or manually selectable. The mic/line card’s input impedance shall be equivalent to the standard line level inputs of the mixer. The matrix shall be capable of external DC controllers via digital I/O ports. The matrix shall be capable of saving and restoring all settings in the event of a power failure. The matrix shall be capable of accepting both AC and DC power supplies. The frequency response of the matrix mixer shall be ± .5dB from 20Hz to 20kHz and +0, -3 from 10Hz to 30kHz. Crosstalk shall be better than -80dB. Crosspoint attenuation resolution shall be .4dB per step. Input impedance shall be 20Kw balanced and 10Kw unbalanced with a maximum level of +24dBV RMS. Output impedance shall be 220w unbalanced and 440w balanced, with a maximum level of +24dBV RMS. Remotes Control modules for Matrix The unit shall be wall-mounted for remotes function as convenient user interfaces for paging, program source selection and volume control. It shall be used for remote controls to conveniently interconnect in LAN bus topology. It shall be possible to connect up to 128 remotes with one matrix mixer via ReO bus communication. The module shall be a digital remote control device designed for source selection or page routing functions. Each remote has four momentary buttons and four corresponding red status LEDs to indicate when a selection has been activated. It shall be programmed to function as a paging station. In this mode, each of the four buttons selects the room or zone to which a page will be routed. Multiple remotes shall be be used if more than four destinations are required. LEDs indicate when a page is successful, or blink to indicate a zone is already being paged into from another location. 1.9
Tape Deck The tape deck shall be multiple cassette players designed to provide continuos music from up to two cassette decks. Each player shall accommodate up to two front loading cassette decks. The unit shall be of Digital processing system with 20 bit A/D and D/A converters, 2 auto reverse cassette transports with rely play, Digital Noise Reduction, Normal/high speed tape dubbing, Dolby HX Pro, Dolby B/C Noise reduction with built-in MPX filter. The mainframe shall play both sides of each cassette before stepping on to the next. If this deck is empty, or has been removed for service, the mainframe shall automatically searches for the next available cassette module. The deck in use is indicated on the mainframe front panel. Each cassette deck module is equipped with LEDs indicating ‘tape loaded’ and ‘tape direction’. Cassettes may be manually ejected by a push-button on each front panel. The tape deck shall be from Pioneer or equal. WOW and Flutter
:
0.09% Page 7 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
Frequency response Signal to Noise Ratio Digital Noise Reduction Harmonic Distortion 4 digit electronic counter Power Consumption 1.10
PART B - SECTION 21 PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
:
20Hz –18,000Hz
: : :
: 90dB (with Dolby B/C NR) 0.8% (-4dB) 2 25W
CD Player The CD player shall be multi-disc one to load a minimum of 6 discs into a magazine for unrepeated play of 6 discs. It shall have 1 bit Direct Linear Conversion and D/A converter, Full function remote control with 6 disc keys and power on/off, Magazine HiLite scan. The unit shall be from Pioneer or equal. All discs could be played sequentially or randomly. The frequency response shall be 2020,000Hz, signal to noise ratio 98dB and total harmonic distortion shall be <.005%. The dynamic range shall be 95 dB and power consumption of 12W. The unit shall be supplied with a remote control. The computer used for loading Matrix operating software shall be an IBM PC 2.0GHz, 128MB RAM, 40GB hard disk, 1.44MB floppy disk, 2 serial port, I parallel port, DVD ROM mouse, keyboard etc. with Windows 98/2000 operating system.
1.11
Desk Top paging Microphone Paging microphones shall be desk top type with provision for selecting up-to fifteen zones. The microphone shall have cardioid response and shall be contoured for high speed intelligibility. It shall have momentary push to talk buttons and busy indicator. Impedance shall be 300 ohms floating.
1.12
Volume Control Volume control shall be provided as shown on the drawings. It shall be stepped, continuously rotating group volume controls with 6dB voltage steps and for control of loads of appropriate speaker zones.
1.13
Music Override Unit Music override units are to be provided as shown on the drawings for overriding any local music being played on an emergency paging from the main amplifier rack. The unit shall be suitable for installation on a single gang backbox and shall be of the same finish as other electrical accessories.
1.14
Loudspeakers Loudspeakers shall be installed in the areas to achieve a uniform sound pressure level. The loudspeakers shall be mounted on walls, ceiling or in ground to meet the site requirements. All loudspeakers shall have 100V line transformer to match 100V amplifier outputs.
Page 8 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 21 PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
The loudspeakers, including horns if used, shall provide music quality reproduction with a frequency response upto at least 14,000Hz. The specified power ratings of the speakers are the maximum values and no speaker is expected to be tapped at the maximum rating. The speakers shall be Penton or equal. 1.15
Sound Projectors The sound projectors shall be used for external areas where false ceiling not available. It shall have a frequency response of 150 Hz-16 kHz and a maximum power rating of 15 watts. The transformer shall have tappings of 15, 7.5, 4.0 and 0.8 watts at 100 volts. The SPL shall be 95dB, 1watt,1m. and the dispersion angle shall be at least 150 deg. The speakers shall be of weatherproof construction in aluminium alloy extruded body and front grill shall be perforated aluminium, with fixing brackets for angled positioning. Ceiling mounted Loudspeaker The ceiling loudspeaker shall include a high compliance loudspeaker, 100 volt transformer and steel construction. The loudspeaker shall have a dispersion angle of 140 deg, a frequency response of 120 Hz-20kHz and a maximum power rating of 6 watts. The transformer shall have power tapping of 6,.3,1.5, and 0.75 watts at 100 volts. The directivity Q factor shall be 2.9 @ 1kHz. Sound Pressure Level shall be 93dB @ 1m, 1watt and 104dB @ full power, 1m The unit shall have a diameter of 189mm and be finished in white (RAL 9010) enamel. Construction shall be of welded steel to prevent vibration and rattle. The baffle shall utilise a torsion spring fixing for installation with either mounting ring or protective enclosure (fire-dome) to suit the site requirement.
Page 9 of 9
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 22 ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
SECTION 22 ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 1 of 11
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 22 ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
SECTION 22 ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM INDEX
1.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.
SOFTWARE
3.
PC REQUIREMENTS
4.
INTELLIGENT CONTROL PANEL
5.
CARD & READERS
6.
BADGE/CARD PRINTER
7.
MAGNETIC DOOR CONTACT
8.
ELECTRIC LOCK, POWER TRANSFER & REMOTE RELEASE / REQUEST TO EXIT
Page 2 of 11
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
PART B - SECTION 22 ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.
The contractor shall appoint a specialist subcontractor for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of an Online Access Control System as per the requirement of the user. The specialist subcontractor shall carry out a comprehensive training program for the security and maintenance personal of the facility. The structure and contents of the training program shall be as detailed in Section 1. The proposed products shall be supported by a local distributor/installer with sufficient experience in the industry. Only the equipment approved by the engineer, shall be delivered to site or installed. The system shall include control panels, smart cards and card readers, magnetic door contacts and magnetic locks as indicated on the drawings. The system shall include any additional accessories or parts those are not indicated on this specifications and drawings required to form a fully operational system to the satisfaction of the engineers. The system shall include proximity cards and proximity readers as indicated on the drawings.
2.
Different control panel configurations for one, two, four, six and eight doors shall be available to allow various combinations of card/card reader or keypad inputs, relay outputs, and alarm inputs to maximize system hardware flexibility. Panels can be combined to provide the exact number of inputs and outputs required for each application. All panels shall support a fully distributed architecture with all real-time processing done at each panel.
3.
The Access Control System shall provide the following minimum features: a)
Instant response to Card Read within 0.25 seconds and reporting on access control monitoring within 2.0 seconds.
b)
No degradation of system performance in case of a communication loss. All time zones access levels, and holiday schedule shall remain operational on such occasion.
c)
No loss of transaction for system history flues. All panels automatically shall switch to buffer mode, capable of storing 10,000+ events per panel.
d)
Each panel shall represent one "Intelligent Controller" in the distributed processing network. Each Controller shall use an Intel 80C88 microprocessor as its engine.
e)
Information shall be downloadable to the panels using either a PC or LAN network. A Computer shall not be necessary for panel operation and may be taken off-line if required, once the system information has been downloaded to the panels. For basic system requirements a PC shall simply be used as a Terminal or Window into the System, History Data Logging Device and Data Manager.
4.
All panels shall have a built-in reset timer (watchdog circuit) that automatically reboots the panel in the event that the processor is interrupted by a transient Page 3 of 11
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 22 ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
surge. When a system processor is reset, it shall automatically request a parameter down load from the Master panel and reboot to its proper working state. If the Master panel is reset, it shall automatically request a parameter download from the PC or LAN. When the Master is a modem location, it shall automatically dial the PC or LAN, via modem, and receive the parameter downloaded.
2.0
5.
The doors shall operate Fail safe/Fail Secure as per Engineers requirements on site. Refer door hardware schedule in Architectural Specification for a comprehensive list of doors to be provided with security / access control devices. The complete scope of work shall include all locations listed in the schedule and / or shown on drawings.
6.
The Contractor shall coordinate the location with the door schedule prepared by the Main Consultant.
7.
The specialist Contractor shall take into consideration of latest Dubai Police requirements and include the same in as part of contract.
SOFTWARE 1.
The access control systems PC or LAN application software shall be a true 32-bit access control software that utilizing a Windows 2000 or NT operating system and combining point monitoring, control with integral Photo I.D. Badging, Guard Tour, Time and Attendance, Alarm Graphics and system integration (interfacing) for CCTV, BMS, Fire, etc. The application software shall be capable of running on either a single PC or on a multi-user Local Area Network.
2.
TCP/IP network communications shall be utilized to provide user interaction and real-time monitoring to workstations or PC's located anywhere on a LAN or WAN. The software shall be password word protected to allow for operator specific capabilities at each workstation. The access control system application software shall incorporate Point and Click operation with hierarchical tree views and pop up menus for ease of use. I/O monitoring and control shall be achieved through animated icons that depict the real-time status of each input or output. The software shall also allow I/O points to be assigned to an Override Group, allowing for multiple inputs and outputs to be monitored and controlled via a single icon.
3.
The access control system application software shall have the ability to support and configure Graphic alarm maps and will provide detailed information regarding any I/O point within the system. The graphic maps will display real-time status of each I/O point and will allow the system operator to perform manual overrides directly from the map.
4.
Photo I.D. Badging shall be integral feature of the access control application software. The system shall have the ability to import card holder images from a file, capture images from a live video source, or work with any device providing a TWAIN interface. The application software shall have the ability to print and store multiple images. Automatic Image Recall and Verification upon card use shall be an integral feature of the access control Windows 2000/NT application software. The software must support signature pads, finger print scanners, bar code and magnetic stripe encoding. A suitable Card printer using latest technologies shall be supplied with the system, including camera, tripod, video capture card etc. Page 4 of 11
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
3.0
PART B - SECTION 22 ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
5.
The access control application software shall have the ability to create badge templates by using drag and drop tools and shall incorporate features such as, transparent backgrounds, image ghosting, text centering, text shrink to fit, bring to front, send to back, layering and rotation to any degree. The software shall also have the ability to create unlimited badge templates, allowing multiple departments and user groups to have unique badges. The software shall support single or two-sided color or black and white badges and will permit either one time or batch process printing.
6.
The access control application software shall have flexible linking capabilities that allow for any card, input or output in any location throughout the distributed network to link (interlock) with any other input or output within that location. The creation of mantraps shall be a matter of software programming and will require no additional hardware.
7.
The access control application software shall provide the ability to create simple or extensive Custom History Reports. The report function shall allow the operator to define reports by cardholder, input, output, events or any combination of these items.
8.
The access control application software shall be fully year 2000 compliant.
PC REQUIREMENTS 1.
CPU Minimum
: Pentium IV – 3.2GHz (or better) - Host PC for single PC, single location system, or LAN workstation for single location system.
2.
Operating System
: Windows 2000 or NT Workstation Version 4.0 (or higher) Service Pack 3 or greater if required. Service Pack 3 shall be included with the Access Control System application software CD. Windows NT Server is required for system with 5 or more workstations.
3.
Memory
: 256 MB of memory for File Server or Comm. Server shall be available.
4.
Drives
: Application software shall be provided on CD only. History archives and database backups performed in the software will utilize the floppy drive or other specified target drive.
5.
Drives
: One Floppy Drive 3.5", 1.44M One CD-RW Drive 16x speeds (or better)
6.
Hard Disk
: 80 Gigabyte Hard Disk (or better).
7.
Monitors
: 19-inch Color monitor, LCD.
8.
Local Area Network : Windows 2000/NT Workstation Version 4.0 or higher with Service Pack 3 (or greater). Windows NT Server is required for 5 or more Workstations. 10 Mbit (or better) LAN card is required. LAN adapter Card 100Mbit (or better) adapter Page 5 of 11
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 22 ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
card. 10/100 base T. TCP / IP - protocol must be loaded even if there is no LAN. 9. 4.0
Serial Ports
: Two Serial Ports
INTELLIGENT CONTROL PANEL The Intelligent Controller Panel (ICP) unit shall have the following specifications: 1.
9600 Baud - Dial-up / 38400 Direct
2.
150 + Card, Reader and Keypad Formats
3.
Flexible I/O Linking
4.
Removable Terminal Blocks
5.
Supports 4 State Input Monitoring
6.
UL 294 Listed and CE approved
7.
Each ICP unit shall be comprised of a processor and an I/O-termination board. This combination will form an Intelligent Controller Panel (ICP). The ICP shall contain an 80C88 processor and RAM chips. The I/O portion shall contain the power supply and field wiring terminals.
8.
The ICP shall be capable of operating as a fully distributed processing control panel that retains all data necessary for system operation in its own RAM. The ICP shall have the ability to check its database and make decisions about output control, alarm monitoring and time zone changes. The ICP shall have an integral real-time clock that allows all time zone events to continue even when PC communications are not available.
9.
The ICP unit shall have the ability to be programmed as either a Master or Slave in a distributed network. A dipswitch selection feature within the ICP shall determine the Master or Slave mode of operation. The first ICP of each location shall be designated as the Master. The Master panel will have the ability to communicate with PC, LAN and Slave panels simultaneously.
10.
Communications between ICP Master panels and a host PC or LAN shall be via RS-232. The ICP manufacturer shall provide fully integrated Windows NT/2000 network compatible system operating software, for the purpose of controlling the ICP network through a Local Area Network (LAN).
11.
The ICP unit shall have 16 E.O.L. supervised inputs for point monitoring. The input shall have a status LED to indicate electrical status regardless of the armed state. The inputs on the ICP shall support two; three and four state monitoring, with five input configurations to choose from. Inputs configured for three and four state circuits shall support trouble reports.
12.
The ICP unit shall be compatible with Wiegand, Barium Ferrite, Proximity, Bar Code, Magnetic Stripe, Biometrics and Smart Card readers and shall allow any Page 6 of 11
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 22 ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
combination of reader technologies to be used in the same system. The ICP unit shall allow keypads to be added with readers in order to create a card and PIN controlled entry point. 13.
There shall be a highly flexible and extensive Programmable-linking feature that allows an input to link to other inputs or to outputs. The Programmable Linking feature shall also allow outputs to link to other outputs or to input. The ICP unit shall also provide the ability of assigning access codes to link to either inputs or outputs or both. The Linking feature shall allow the ICP to be used for a multitude of applications including Floor Select Elevator Control, HVAC Control and Alarm Annunciation and Control.
14.
The ICP unit shall have a standard configuration of 64K of ROM and 64K of RAM. The RAM memory allocation shall be dynamic and set for optimum use by the Host PC, or LAN operator according to the data entered for each location. The RAM memory shall be expandable from 64K up to 192K by adding up to four 32K RAM chips.
15.
The Pre-Warn Output of the ICP unit shall be used to indicate the controlled door is being held open and about to go into alarm.
19.
Temperature Operating Storage
32 to 131 F -35 to 150 F
20.
Humidity
Operating 0 to 95%, relative
21.
Supply Voltage
Panel Voltage 16.5 VAC 40VA AUX DC Voltage 12-24 VAC 40VA Power Requirements 33 Watts (.031 BTU) Panel Current Draw 550 ma
22.
Output Voltage
Panel outputs shall provide a regulated voltage. The AUX DC output provides an unregulated voltage from the AUX AC supply voltage.
23.
Inputs
Panel Output – 1 Panel Output – 2 Panel Output – 3 Panel Output – 4
12VDC 1A Fused 9 VDC 300ma current limited 5 VDC 300ma Fused 12-24 VDC 3A Fused
EOL Supervised
16
Inputs 7 and 8 shall be used for the door position switch and exit request unless otherwise programmed. All Inputs support two, three and four state monitoring and five programmable circuit types. 24.
Outputs
25.
Controlled Entry Points
26.
Charging Output
Form C Relays 8 Relay Output Ratings 5 Amp 24 VDC / 5Amp 115VAC LED Outputs 6 - 3 per reader Pre-Warn Outputs 2 - 1 per door Two Card Reader or Keypad Trickle Charge Page 7 of 11
13.5 VDC 500ma Fused
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
5.0
PART B - SECTION 22 ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
27.
Standby time ICP unit under Maximum Load shall be 3.25 hours. The ICP shall tests the integrity of the Battery once every 24 hours.
28.
Comm. Ports
RS-232 Port RS-485 In RS-485 Out
29.
I/O Extender
1 No. for expansion of Inputs or Outputs
30.
Processor
Intel 80C88 or V20
31.
RAM Memory Standard Expandable to
32.
The transaction buffer shall automatically adjust to use any RAM not allocated for system parameters. Upon completion of a download from PC or LAN to a Master ICP, the Event Buffer size is reported to the PC or LAN and displayed on the Monitor Screen(s).
33.
ICP Packaging The ICP unit shall be supplied complete with Processor Board, I/O board, Ribbon Cable, 16 EOL Resistors, Enclosure, Lock and Key, Wiring Label, Anchors and Wire Ties, Tamper Switch, and an External AC Power Indicator.
1 2 1
Master Comm., Modem or direct One for Master, One for Slave For Subsequent Slaves
8Mhz 64K 192K
CARD & READERS 1.
ACCESS CARD
a.
Contact less, multiple applications ISO credit card size card with high-speed read/write (106 kbits/s) and data exchange with the reader as specified in ISO 7816 shall be used in the system.
b.
The cards shall be plain white, wiegand encoded, gloss finish on both sides and shall be directly printable on both sides.
c.
The read distance of the cards using relevant proximity reader shall be upto 10 cms, with fast transaction time of less than 100 ms.
d.
Cards shall be constructed of laminated PVC, with data retention on temperature range of –25 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C.
e.
300 nos. cards to be supplied with Video badging.
2. PROXIMITY CARD READER 1.
The system shall be equipped with proximity card readers with keypad and a tamper switch as shown on the drawings. It shall be possible to use different types of cards/readers in the system.
2.
The Proximity Reader shall be a Uni-Directional Indoor or Outdoor unit designed for mounting on any surface including solid metal. The reader can be mounted behind most building materials such as sheet rock, or it can be mounted with its Page 8 of 11
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 22 ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
side against a metal door or window frame. This unit shall have a read range of more than six cms. 3.
The Proximity Reader shall be a unitized reader with a standard Wiegand output that connects directly to the access control panel without the use of an interface module. The reader shall be designed to work with any HID proximity cards.
4.
The card reader shall read the encoded data from the access card and/or transponder and transmit the data back to the host panel, giving an audible and visual indication of a properly read card and shall have a hold line that will buffer a card read until the panel has asserted that the information can be sent up line.
5.
The card reader shall have a re-present mode in which the card must be taken from the reader field for one second before being read again. This feature is required to prevent multiple reads from a single card presentation The reader shall be powered from the access control panel (ICP) directly. Warranty
Lifetime warranty
Color
Black
Construction
Polycarbonate
Operating Voltage
10 to 15 VDC
Indications
Bi color Green/Red, Amber LED and audible tone
Temperature
-30 to +65 Deg C
Humidity
5 -95%, relative (indoor models)
Cable Requirements Seven conductor 22 AWG shielded Reader Distance
Maximum 150 Mtrs. From the Panel
Standards
FCC and CE
Size
5.25" x 2.75" x 1.375"
6.
The card reader shall have the following reader configuration options:
A.
Reader beeps and flashes green on a card read, LED normally red, single line control of LED.
B.
Reader flashes green on a card read, LED normally red, single line control of LED.
C.
Reader beeps on a card read, LED normally red, single line control of LED.
D.
Reader beeps and flashes green on a card read, LED normally off, red and green LED's controlled individually.
E.
Reader flashes green on a card read, LED normally off, red and green LED's controlled individually. Page 9 of 11
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
6.0
PART B - SECTION 22 ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
F.
Reader beeps on a card read, LED normally off, red and green LED's controlled individually.
G.
Beeper and LED are controlled by host only, LED normally off, red and green LED controlled individually.
BADGE/CARD PRINTER 1.
Card/badge printer to direct graphic print the cards with necessary software, camera, tripod and scanner shall be provided with the system including supplies for printing 1000 cards. The card printer shall be with following minimum specifications. Print Method:
Dye-Sublimation/Resin Thermal Transfer
Resolution:
300 dpi (11.8 dots/mm)
Colors:
Up to 16.7 million
Print Ribbon:
Full color with resin black, YMCKO
Print Speed:
8 seconds per card / 450 cards 35 seconds per card / 102 cards per hour
Accepted Sizes:
Standard
Card CR-80 (3.375” x 2.125” / 85.6mm CR-90 (3.63” x 2.37” / 92mm x 60mm)
Maximum Print Area:
per x
hour
54mm)
3.37”L x 2.14”W / 85.5mmL x 54.5mmW
Maximum Range:
Card
Width 2.1" to 2.63" / 53mm to 67mm
Maximum Range:
Card
Length 3.25" to 3.625" / 82mm to 92mm
Maximum Card Thickness:
.010" to .060" / .254mm to 1.5mm
Card Types:
PVC or polyester cards with polished PVC finish.
Card Capacity:
100 cards (.030") or 300 cards (.010"); auto or manual feed
Display:
LCD display shows printer status and diagnostic error prompts
Software Drivers:
Windows® 3.1x and Windows 95/98; Windows NT and Macintosh®
Interface:
Standard 8-bit parallel (ECP compatible) or Macintosh serial; network compatible
Operating Temperature:
65° to 80° F / 18° to 27° C
Humidity:
20-80% non-condensing
Dimensions:
8.4"H x 13.6"W x 12.7"D / 213mmH x 345mmW x 323mmD
Weight:
16.3 lbs. / 7.4kg
Agency Listings:
Safety: UL 1950, CSA C2.2 and TüV-GS (IEC-950) Emissions: FCC Class B, CRC c1374, Class B and TüVPage 10 of 11
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 22 ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
EMC (IEC-801 -2, -3, -4; CISPR 22, Class B), CE
7.0
Supply Voltage:
100-240 VAC, 2A
Supply Frequency:
50 Hz/60 Hz
Options:
* USB Interface Cable * Ethernet Interface Adapter
MAGNETIC DOOR CONTACT Magnetic door contacts shall be provided on all doors equipped with the access control system and the doors indicated in the drawing and listed in the door hardware schedule to monitor the door status. It shall be possible to arm and disarm the doors to be monitored manually or using the time zones in the system. The door contacts shall meet following minimum specifications:
8.0
Contact Type:
SPST, Gold under plating and deactivated Rhodium outer plating
Switch Cycles:
50 Million
Operation Gap:
One Inch
Colors:
White, Brown, Grey
Construction:
Weatherproof, high impact ABS plastic
Rating:
0.1 Amp/100 VDC
Temperature:
-25 Deg. C to 70 Deg. C
ELECTRIC LOCK, POWER TRANSFER & REMOTE RELEASE / REQUEST TO EXIT The system shall be complete with electric locks, power transfer and remote release / request to exit push buttons located as shown on drawings and as listed in the door hardware schedule. Electromagnetic door holders shall be provided as part of Fire Alarm System for Fire doors as shown on drawings and as listed in the door hardware schedule. Automatic sliding doors shall be provided as detailed in Architectural Specification. Wherever required, kick switches shall be provided to operate sliding doors. All doors provided with Access Control System and all automatic sliding doors shall be interlocked with fire alarm system.
Page 11 of 11
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 23 IP TV SYSTEM
SECTION 23 IP TV SYSTEM
Page 1 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 23 IP TV SYSTEM
SECTION 23 IP TV SYSTEM INDEX
1.0
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Page 2 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
1.0
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.1
General
PART B - SECTION 23 IP TV SYSTEM
Compliance with sections of Division I, General and documents referred to therein. The contractor shall supply, install, test and commission a Internet Protocol Television System for distribution of digital television channels coming from 3 satellites specified by transport streaming through IP and packet switched network to all outlet points indicated in the drawing. The primary system equipment and components shall be installed by a specialist sub contractor and is to be approved by the Resident Engineer in accordance with the specifications as listed in this document. The IPTV system supplier / installer shall be a specialist and has such trained technicians for engineering assistance, installation and maintenance of the equipment. All of the equipment or components for the system installed shall be from the same manufacturer, except for items not included in their manufacturing range. Items not included in the range of manufacturer shall be proposed to and be separately approved by engineer. The system shall be capable of providing television reception of all local, neighboring, and international channels broadcasted and receivable in this area. 3. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS The IPTV system is based on the principle that the IP streamers are DVB to IP gateways designed to broadcast in multicast on IP network, the services (TV or Radio programs) issued from digital satellite, terrestrial or cable reception, or from professional DVB equipment. The streamers shall be modular construction as to allow for easy upgrading and adding of future channels and fully compatible with analog and digital transmission technology. The streamers modules shall have two directionally coupled input ports that facilitate simple connection of the incoming signal using the plug bridges. For power connection each module has two DC banana sockets that allow to build the +12 Vdc cascade from the power supply module. A third banana socket is available to connect the power for the attached LNB. The equipment shall be housed in a weatherproof, lockable cabinet, allowing for sufficient ventilation, preferably being located in a climate-controlled environment. A. IP Streaming Module The specification of the IP streaming device module shall be as follows:Input : 1 DVB transport stream (MPTS) Output : up to 8 simultaneous IP-encapsulated programs with individual multicast address Filtering of information contained in the MPEG-2 tables UDP and RTP transmission protocols Web interface for module configuration SAP and SDP protocols to facilitate automatic program selection in the set-top box and to provide program information to external servers PID filtering Page 3 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 23 IP TV SYSTEM
PSI/SI parsing ECM and EMM transparent pass through Regeneration or blockade of CAT, NIT, SDT, EIT and TDT tables QoS marking configurable TTL configurable
DVB-S to IP Streamer Frequency Range
950 - 2150 MHz
Input Level
-65 … -25 dBm
Input Symbol Rate
2 … 45 MS/s
Standard
IEEE 802.3 10/100 BaseT
Bit Rate
up to 100 Mbps
Transmission Protocol No. of simultaneous streams Multicast
UDP/RTP up to 8
Configuration
RS 232 / DB-9
Connectors
Ethernet Output
RJ-45
Supply Voltage Operating temperature
+12 Vdc
General
Input Section (QPSK)
Output Section (IP)
Yes
0 … +45 ºC
Configuration and setting of the streamers shall be carried out through a web browser running on a PC provided with Ethernet adapter.
Page 4 of 4
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B - SECTION 24 MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
SECTION 24 MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
Page 1 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B - SECTION 24 MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
INDEX
1.0
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Page 2 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B - SECTION 24 MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
1.0
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.1
Description of Work The contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and maintain during warranty period the complete mobile radio system as specified herein for the hotel and serviced apartment buildings. The system shall be of the latest state of art technology in digital mobile radio system and shall be based on DECT( Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunication) technology or equivalent. Scope of work shall include the supply, installation, testing, and commissioning of the whole system including but not limited to the following: a) b) c) d) e) f) g)
30 nos indoor 6 channel base stations 15 nos. outdoor 6 channel base stations PC based management system for the subscription of the mobile phones and programming the features. Interface to the Property Management System PC based Text messaging system 80 Mobile Handsets All related control, communication and power cabling, accessories and terminations.
No. of base stations mentioned above are only indicative. Actual no. of base stations shall be decided by the contractor based on a detailed site survey with all the required advanced equipment. Contractor shall conduct the site survey and provide the required no. of base stations at strategic locations to obtain complete coverage of the area to consultant approval. The contractor shall negotiate the necessary application for frequency allocation with Ministry of Communication and shall be responsible to pay all the necessary charges to Ministry of Communication. The system should defines a Common Interface (CI) for equipment (between the Fixed network part and the portable part) The system supports both the Public Access Protocol (PAP), which has some proprietary aspects and the Generic Access Protocol (GAP), which secures compatibility of the system equipment of different suppliers for basic speech call. The latter allows the users freedom of choice for the portable terminal equipment. System should have micro-cellular system, which means that the system makes use of a network of radios with a low transmitter power (250 MW). A cordless extension must be registered by the system before it can be used to make or receive calls. This registration process is called subscription. Subscription to the system requires a Personal Identification Number (PIN) allocated by the Communications manager. Once subscribed the extension can be temporarily removed, or blacklisted if required. The cordless extension monitors the quality of the radio link during a call. If the interference on a certain carrier (frequency) and timeslot causes problems, it should switch to another frequency at that same base station. This is called intra-cell hand over. This hand over procedure requires that the connection can be supported on 2 channels simultaneously, for a while, to allow a "seamless hand over". So, first, the handset selects Page 3 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B - SECTION 24 MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
a new (interference free) channel and sets up a connection via that channel, while the old channel is still in use. Secondly, the old channel is disconnected. The user will not notice anything of the hand over. If the mobile user roams from one cell to another, during the conversation, he will probably go out of range of the first radio and into the range of the second. In that case, if the quality of the transmission requires it, the radio link will switch over to the new radio. This is called inter-cell hand over, which will also be seamless. 1.2
Continuous Dynamic Channel Selection The system handset should continuously monitor its environment and autonomously selects the best frequency, timeslot and base station. This selection and possible change should be unnoticeable for the user, when moving through the system network and during a call. This process is called Continuous Dynamic Channel Selection (CDCS) .Due to this CDCS process cells may overlap and no frequency planning is required, as is the case for many other types of cellular systems. Speech communication between handsets should be encrypted (or scrambled) If a cordless telephone set is lost or stolen it should be possible for the communications manager to blacklist the set. This means that can no longer be used within the DECT area.
1.3
Frequencies and Timeslots System should pirate in a frequency range of 1880 - 1890 MHz. There are ten carriers defined and in each carrier 12 full duplex (12 up link + 12 down link) time slots. This allows 120 full duplex channels in the air. Frequencies and time slots are re-used in the covered area and dynamically selected, so the maximum number of available channels always high enough even in high traffic density areas. Due to the maximum number of duplex time slots, the maximum number of simultaneous connections per RFP should be 6 or 12.
1.4
Radio Base-Stations With a radio base station a radio environment (cell) is created in which the portable telephone can operate. The radio base station should provide the air interface between the fixed network and the portables. The RFP is the radio base station or the Transceiver for the radio signals. The following should be made available: Indoor RFP that can handle a maximum of 6 simultaneous calls (6 channel RFP). Indoor RFP that can handle a maximum of 12 simultaneous calls (12 channel RFP). If required Directional Antennas should be used to cover the required range.
1.5
PP (Portable Part) The Portable Part of the system handset should be delivered with the iS Mobile system comply with the GAP (Generic Access Profile), ETS 300 175 agreements.
1.6
Base Station The Base Station should supports the following features Page 4 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B - SECTION 24 MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) 1.7
Supports DECT GAP compatible handsets 10/100 Mbits Ethernet interface Full non-blind slot radio Secure DECT encryption Support of G.729ab for compression, silence suppression and comfort noise insertion Roaming and seamless handovers. LRMS messaging (max. 160 characters) CLIP and Name display Overlap sending Enquiry DTMF and call progress tones Message waiting indication Downloadable software Plug-and-play installation Flexible assignment of channels
Environmental Conditions ETS 300 019-1-3, temperature range: Storage class 1.2 (–25° C to +60° C) Transport class 2.3 (–40°C to +70° C) Operation class 3.1 (0° C to +60°C) With optional outdoor box: Operation class 3.3 (–20° C to +50°C) Relative humidity < 90 % (non condensing)
1.8
Safety -
1.9
EN60950-1:2001 EN50385 Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) EN301489-1 and 6 EN61000-3-2/3 (AC supply) DECT EN301406 V1.4.1: 2001-03 EN300757 (Service class 2)
Reliability -
1.10
MTBF < 4600 FIT (Failure In Time) Technical lifetime > 7 years
Hand Sets Type- I (10 Nos.) Handsets carry a CE mark and conform to: EMC: EN301 489-1, EN 301 489-6 EMF: EN50360 Radio: EN301406 Telecom: TBR10, TBR22 Safety: EN60950-1 Page 5 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B - SECTION 24 MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
The graphic LCD (96 x 60 pixels) features a single icon (head) line, three text lines of 16 characters and a soft key line. Light, slim-line, ergonomic design Up to 20 hours calling time 200 hours stand-by time Loudspeaker mode for hands-free operation (with indicator) Built-in vibrator for silent alert Illuminated display and keypad Personal phone book (100 entries of 16 characters and 32 digits) CLI (name & number) support Pre-dial number preparation/correction Caller log (last 30 calls answered, missed, rejected or filtered, including date/time stamp) 20-number redial Incoming call filter (10) Quick call (9 numbers) Alphanumeric messaging (LRMS) Multiple subscriptions (10) with automatic/manual selection Ringer melodies (30) with individual melodies for all alerts Adjustable ringer volume (8 settings) Adjustable earpiece, loudspeaker and headset volume (8 settings) Multiple menu languages (12) Recall/hold (PBX enquiry) Call-reject option SOS key Microphone mute Keypad lock Silent charging Auto answer Automatic encryption for secure calls Easy menu programming Alarm (watch) function Date & time display Call-duration display Date/time stamp on logged calls and received messages Headset connection with hook switch in cable (standard 2.5 mm plug) Standard rechargeable batteries (3x AAA 1.2V/800mAh NiMH) Removable belt clip Chargers TYPE-II (20 Nos.) Handsets carry a CE mark and conform to: -
EMC: EN301 489-1, EN301 489-6 EMF: EN50360 Radio: EN301406 Telecom: TBR10 Safety: EN 60950-1 Page 6 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B - SECTION 24 MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
The graphic LCD (96x33 pixels) features a single icon (head) line, one text line of 16 characters and a soft key line: Adjustable ringer volume (7 settings) Adjustable earpiece and loudspeaker volume (7 settings) Auto answer when lifting from charger Automatic encryption for secure calls Call-reject option Caller log (last 20 calls answered, missed or rejected) CLI (name & number) support Easy menu programming GAP/CAP compatible 200 hours stand-by time Illuminated display Keypad lock Last-number redial (10) Light, slim-line ergonomic design Loudspeaker mode for hands-free operation (with indication) Microphone mute Multiple menu languages (12) Multiple subscriptions (5) with automatic/manual selection On-hook number preparation with correction option Personal phone book (50 entries with 16 characters and 32 digits) Provides crystal clear voice quality and seamless handover Quick call (9 numbers) Recall/ hold (PBX enquiry) Removable belt clip Ringer melodies (10) with individual ringer melodies for all alerts Silent charging SOS key Standard rechargeable batteries (3x AAA 1.2V/800mAh NiMH) Up to 20 hours talk time TYPE-III (70 Nos.) Handsets carry a CE mark and conform to: -
EMC: EN301 489-1, EN301 489-6 EMF: EN50360 Radio: EN301406 Telecom: TBR10 Safety: EN 60950-1
Dust and water proof to IP 54. The graphic LCD (96x33 pixels) features a single icon (head) line, four text line of 16 characters: Adjustable ringer volume (8 settings) Adjustable earpiece and loudspeaker volume (8 settings) Auto answer when lifting from charger Automatic encryption for secure calls Call-reject option Caller log (last 30 calls answered, missed or rejected) CLI (name & number) support Easy menu programming Page 7 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B - SECTION 24 MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
1.11
GAP/CAP compatible 100 hours stand-by time Illuminated display Keypad lock Last-number redial (10) Robust design Loudspeaker mode for hands-free operation (with indication) Microphone mute Multiple menu languages (12) Multiple subscriptions (5) with automatic/manual selection On-hook number preparation with correction option Personal phone book (100 entries with 16 characters and 32 digits) Provides crystal clear voice quality and seamless handover Quick call (9 numbers) Recall/ hold (PBX enquiry) Removable belt clip Ringer melodies (10) with individual ringer melodies for all alerts Silent charging SOS key Standard rechargeable batteries (3x AAA 1.2V/800mAh NiMH) Up to 7 hours talk time Chargers
Text Messaging System System should supports the following DECT E2 Messages (up to 160 characters) supports up to 160 characters, the DECT equipment and/or the handset may limit this to 128 or even 48 characters. If the handset supports only 48 characters, the message can be chopped and sent in parts to the handset. Sending messages to the Digital extensions telephone of the PABX or DECT extensions during ringing and in call connect status. Message length can specified per device type. Also if messages are to long to be displayed, they can be chopped into parts that can be displayed. SMS messages to Cell phones. The System should send SMS messages to cell phones. The interface to the Cell Phone provider can be a modem or special box that behaves like a real cell phone with SIM card. This option is mainly used as alternative device. If a message to a DECT handset is not acknowledged, the message can be forwarded to a cell phone. E-mail messages. E-mails can be sent via SMTP to any E-mail server. The E-mail contains the message that needs to be sent. Digital output to control relays or similar equipment. Page 8 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B - SECTION 24 MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
The relay contacts can be use to control e.g. door-contacts, hooters in case of an alarm or lamps. Contacts are specifically used as alternative device (overflow) , in case a message is not confirmed. ESPA 4.4.4 pager protocol. The System should send pager messages to paging equipment using the ESPA 4.4.4 protocol. The System should consist of separate modules. There are three main groups of Modules: 1.12
Message Handling Functions -
1.13
Core software Modules Input and Output Modules Security modules
Conditional messages Flexible call-cycle definition Free message input Group nesting Individual calendar function Manual messages from operator Manual messaging Message chopping (for very long messages) Message confirmation (LRMS, urgent) Message destinations based on working hours and holidays Message diversion Message overflow on non-receipt Message urgency levels: normal, urgent and very urgent. Messaging to groups Messaging to individuals Messaging via web access Outstanding alarm confirmation, by dialing the PBX (CLI or PIN) Pre-programmed messages Priority queuing Repeat message sending Script messages for emergency situations Timed messages Week calendar function
Alarm Sending Functions -
Connect external alarm systems as output Dynamic destination (depending on message length) GSM or WAN paging Location indication in alarm messages Message division over several display lines Message scroll on display Messages in outgoing e-mails Message queuing for SMS Protocol support (on request) Provider access Short messages linked in groups Page 9 of 10
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B - SECTION 24 MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
-
SMS confirmation via CLID SMS confirmation via DTMF/PIN To external GSM phones To internal analogue and digital sets (user-to-user) To LRMS/DECT handsets To Messenger @ Net application from DECT LRMS handset To non-LRMS/DECT handsets (user-to-user) To third-party applications using ESPA 4.4.4
Messenger @ Net Alarm capture Functions -
Alarms generated by calling a predefined extension number. Alarms initiated based on incoming e-mails Alarms initiated based on incoming voice calls (CLID) Alarms set, reset and confirmed based on inbound calls Connections to contacts: physical contacts (NO, NC, pulse), voltage and current sensor inputs, or digital E-mail confirmation of acceptance or rejection Play pre-recorded voice messages Reset alarms based on input from hardware contacts Set up a call to a device and play a wav file linked to a specific alarm Various protocols supported on a serial interface (refer to detailed protocol list) Via ESPA 4.4.4 interface Via Ethernet TCP/IP Via serial interface Via SNMP
Page 10 of 10